ATV31(E)

Variable speed drives Altivar 31 High performanceinstinctively! Catalogue October 03 For 3-phase asynchronous motors from 0.18 to 15 kW Contents Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 2 to 9 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 10 to 13 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 14 to 17 Options v Braking resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 18 and 19 v Line chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 20 and 21 v Additional EMC input filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 22 and 23 v Output filters and motor chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 24 and 25 v Communication options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 26 and 27 b b b PowerSuite software workshop. . . . . . . . . . . pages 28 and 29 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 30 and 35 Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36 and 37 Mounting and installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 38 and 39 b b b b Combinations for self-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schneider Electric worldwide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 40 to 43 b pages 44 to 59 b pages 60 to 65 1 Presentation 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 ESC ENT stop reset FWO REV RUN 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 2 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 31HppM2 and ATV 31HppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements. three analog inputs. see pages 7 and 8. hoists. etc). Drives are available for motor ratings between 0. easy to use and conforms to EN 50178.18 kW to 2. IEC/EN 61800-3 standards. if conformity to EMC standards is required. menu navigation keys and local control (Run/Stop and speed reference set by a potentiometer). compressors. kneaders. The Altivar 31 is robust. UL/CSA certification and to e marking. Altivar 31 drives are supplied with a heatsink for normal environments and ventilated enclosures. 0. IEC/EN 61800-2.37 kW to 15 kW b 525 V to 600 V 3-phase. 6. Filters are available as an option for customer assembly.18 kW and 15 kW. Options and accessories The following options and accessories can be used with the Altivar 31 drive: b Braking resistors b Line chokes b EMC radio interference input filters and output filters b Plates for mounting on 5 rail b UL Type 1 conformity kit b Adaptor plate for replacing an Altivar 28 drive Various dialogue and communication options 4. U and customised acceleration and deceleration ramps b +/. These two protocols are integrated as standard into the drive. The main functions integrated in the drive are as follows: b Motor and drive protection b Linear.2 kW b 200 V to 240 V 3-phase. Altivar 31 drives communicate on Modbus and CANopen industrial buses.). etc. including: b Materials handling (small conveyors.18 kW to 15 kW b 380 V to 500 V 3-phase. 0. 5. compact. one logic/analog output and two relay outputs. 0. Multiple units can be mounted side by side 3 to save space. S. b Pumps.speed b 16 preset speeds b PI references and regulator b 2-wire/3-wire control b Brake sequence b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection and automatic restart b Fault configuration and stop type configuration b Saving the configuration in the drive Several functions can be assigned to one logic input. b Packing and packaging machines. 7 can be used with the drive. 0. It incorporates functions that are suitable for the most common applications. textile machines.75 kW to 15 kW Altivar 31 drives are available with a choice of two different human-machine interfaces: b 1 ATV 31Hpppp with displays and menu navigation keys b 2 ATV 31HppppA with displays. with four types of power supply: b 200 V to 240 V single phase. ATV 31HppM3X and ATV 31HppS6X drives are available without EMC filter. Functions The Altivar 31 drive has six logic inputs. b Specialist machines (mixers.Presentation (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Applications The Altivar 31 drive is a frequency inverter for 3-phase squirrel cage asynchronous motors. Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 3 . fans. Presentation 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Enclosed drive 0 ESC ENT stop reset FWO REV RUN 2 3 1 4 5 4 . Enclosed drives are available in power ratings from 0.2. There are two types of power supply: b 200 V to 240 V single phase. 3. All components must be ordered separately and wired by the customer.2 kOhm potentiometer These references can be found in our specialist catalogues. see pages 7 and 8.2 kW b 380 V to 500 V 3-phase. circuit-breaker. Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 5 . contactor) required for the motor starter function can be found on pages 40 and 41. 4.Presentation (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Enclosed drive 0 Applications The enclosed Altivar 31 drive is suitable for applications requiring: .LED XB5 AVpp .18 kW to 4 kW.37 kW and 4 kW Customisable enclosed drive This range allows full customisation of the human-machine interface of an enclosure.Selector switch with 3 fixed positions XB5 D33 . and 1 speed reference potentiometer 9 button for the RJ45 connector with IP 55 cable 10 cable glands for cable routing The combinations (drive. 5 can be used with the drive. 0. the enclosure can be installed next to the motor. 0. Example references: . The IP 55 enclosure includes: b a drive with external heatsink b removable covers for installation of the following components: 7 Vario switch disconnector or GV2 circuit-breaker 8 3 buttons and/or LEDs with plastic flange Ø 22.IP 55 degree of protection in a hostile environment .18 kW and 2. Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 31CppM2 and ATV 31CppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements.3-pole Vario switch disconnector (Vpp + KCp 1pZ) . 8 7 9 10 Options and accessories The following options and accessories can be used with the enclosed Altivar 31 drive: b Braking resistors b Line chokes b RJ45 connector with IP 55 cable Various dialogue and communication options 2.a drive that is ready for use in a motor starter Once it has been customised. Presentation 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Drive kit 0 4 3 2 5 ESC ENT stop reset FWO REV RUN 9 1 2 10 11 12 8 7 4 3 6 6 . The unit is supported by a metal plate 3 fixed to the heatsink. There are two types of power supply: b 200 V to 240 V single phase. power and control subassemblies) b EMC filter b Mechanical fittings b Seals required for use in difficult environments (IP 55) The kit is mounted on a metal fixing support with no flange or protective cover. The drives have been sized to conform to the following standards: IEC/EN61800-3.Presentation (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Drive kit 0 Applications The drive kit is a new addition to the Altivar 31 drives range. Two fans are fitted behind the plate under the heatsink. 12 can be used with the drive. Drive kits are supplied with: b A drilling and cutting template to assist with installation b A user’s manual with installation instructions and safety precautions. 11. Additional fixing holes 7 are provided for component mounting (GV2 circuit-breaker. The Altivar 31 drive kit can be built into a floor-standing or wall-mounted enclosure or a machine frame. Options and accessories The following options and accessories can be used with the Altivar 31 drive kit: b Braking resistors b Line chokes Various dialogue and communication options 9. The plate is sealed on all sides 4. The drive kit comprises: b Altivar 31 drive elements (heatsink.18 kW to 15 kW. The power terminals 5 are protected (IP 20). Description b Drive kit for power ratings y 4 kW 1 The Altivar 31 drive components (heatsink. see pages 7 and 8. domestic and industrial environments. etc. power and control subassemblies) are fixed by mechanical adaptors 2 and protective fittings. 10. 0. The plate is sealed on all sides. the drive kit is fixed to the base of the floorstanding or wall-mounted enclosure by means of this plate. Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 7 . Vario switch disconnector. The metal support plate 3 for the components is fitted with brackets 8 for mounting in a floor-standing or wall-mounted enclosure. additional plate.18 kW to 2.2 kW b 380 V to 500 V 3-phase.). Once the support has been cut out. The drive kit is available for power ratings from 0. 0. b Drive kit for power ratings u 5. power and control subassemblies) are fixed by mechanical adaptors 2 and protective fittings.37 kW to 15 kW Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 31KppM2 and ATV 31KppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements.5 kW 6 The Altivar 31 drive components (heatsink. Presentation 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Dialogue options 0 The Altivar 31 drive communicates with the following options: b Remote terminal b PowerSuite software workshop b Ethernet/Modbus bridge b Communication gateways The communication function provides access to the drive’s configuration. The remote terminal can be mounted on the door of an enclosure with IP 65 protection on the front panel. It can be used: b to control. ESC for settings and configurations FWD/REV key: reverses the direction of rotation of the motor RUN key: motor run command STOP/RESET key: motor stop command or drive fault reset 563220 1 ESC ENT stop reset FWO REV 2 RUN Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 8 . 2 v v v v Use of keys: Navigation arrows and ENT. adjust and configure the drive remotely b for visible remote signalling b to save and download configurations (4 configuration files can be saved) Description 1 Display v Four 7-segment displays visible at 5 m v Displays numeric values and codes v The display flashes when a value is stored. The terminal provides access to the same functions as the display and integral keys on the drive (see page 45). adjustment. control and signalling functions. v The display flashes to indicate a fault on the drive. Remote terminal The Altivar 31 can be connected to a remote terminal. 563016 174 CEV 300 10 Communication gateways The Altivar 31 can connect to other communication buses by means of the following gateways: b Fipio/Modbus. Ethernet/Modbus bridge The Altivar 31 can be connected to an Ethernet network via an Ethernet/Modbus bridge. b DeviceNet/Modbus b Profibus DP/Modbus See pages 26 and 27. 563017 LUF P1 563018 LA9 P307 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 9 . Ethernet communication is primarily intended for the following applications: b Coordination between PLCs b Local or centralised supervision b Communication with production management software b Communication with remote I/O b Communication with industrial control products See pages 26 and 27.Presentation 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Communication options 0 563019 PowerSuite software workshop PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions offer the following advantages: b Display messages in plain text and multiple languages b Prepare work in design office without connecting the Altivar to the PC b Save configurations and settings to floppy disk or hard disk and download them to the drive b Print out settings b Read and import Altivar 28 files into the Altivar 31. See pages 28 and 29. EMC immunity and EMC conducted and radiated emissions.. ATV 31Kppp Maximum operating altitude Operating position Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical mounting position °C m Drive characteristics Output frequency range Switching frequency Speed range Transient overtorque Braking torque 0…500 2…16 adjustable during operation 1…50 170-200% of nominal motor torque (typical value) 100% of nominal motor torque continuously and up to 150% for 60 s Value of nominal motor torque (typical value) according to ratings: 30% for > ATV 31pU15pp 50% for y ATV 31pU15pp 100% for y ATV 31p075pp 150% for y ATV 31p018M2 150% of the nominal drive current for 60 seconds (typical value) Sensorless flux vector control with PWM (pulse width modulation) type motor control signal. EN). energy saving or constant torque U/f for special motors. b IEC/EN 61000-4-2 level 3 b IEC/EN 61000-4-3 level 3 b IEC/EN 61000-4-4 level 4 b IEC/EN 61000-4-5 level 3 (power access) b IEC/EN 61800-3. EN 61800-3 category C1 With additional EMC filter (1): b EN 55011 class A group 1. environments: 2 (industrial supply) and 1 (public supply) restricted distribution b EN 55011 class A group 1. EN 61800-3 category C3 With additional EMC filter (1): b EN 55022 class A group 1.. EN 61800-3 category C2 With additional EMC filter: b EN 55022 class B group 1.. 1 gn from 13 to 150 Hz 15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 5…95 without condensation or dripping water. without protective cover on top of the drive (see derating curves. ATV 31HpppM3X.CU15M2. EN 61800-3 category C2 b EN 55022 class B group 1. ATV 31H037N4.. ATV 31HpppN4.. in particular: low-voltage EN 50178. EN 61800-3 category C1 The drives bear e marking in accordance with the European low voltage (73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC) and EMC (89/336/EEC) directives UL. NOM 117 and C-Tick b IP 31 and IP 41 on upper part and IP 21 on connection terminals b IP 20 without cover plate on upper part of cover b IP 55 2 TC Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6: 1. EN 61800-3 category C2 b EN 55022 class B group 1..10…+ 60 with derating...10…+ 40 without derating 1000 without derating (above this..HU15M2..10…+ 50 without derating. Possible options: specific ratios for pumps and fans. Automatic whatever the load.HD15N4. derate the current by 1% per additional 100 m) EMC immunity EMC conducted and radiated emissions for drives All ATV 31H018M2..... with protective cover on top of the drive .25…+ 70 .HD15S6X e marking Product certification Degree of protection ATV 31HpppM2.HU40N4. environments 1 and 2 b IEC/EN 61800-3.. Factory-set with the speed loop stability and gain Possible options for machines with high resistive torque or high inertia. ATV 31HpppS6X ATV 31CpppM2. ATV 31C018M2. ATV 31H075S6X. EN 61800-3 category C1 b EN 55011 class A group 2.Characteristics 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Environment Conformity to standards Altivar 31 drives have been developed to conform to the strictest international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC. ATV 31HU55N4. ATV 31H018M3X. (1) See table on page 23 to check authorised cable lengths Hz kHz With braking resistor Without braking resistor Maximum transient current Voltage/frequency ratio Frequency loop gain Slip compensation Presentation: pages 2 to 9 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 10 . or for machines with fast cycles. ATV 31C037N4. ATV 31CpppN4 Degree of pollution Climatic treatment Vibration resistance Shock resistance Relative humidity Ambient temperature around the unit Drive without 5 rail option Storage Operation ATV 31Hppp % °C °C ATV 31Cppp. ATV 31CU22M2.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz. Can be suppressed or adjusted.HD15M3X. Factory-set for most constant torque applications. conforming to IEC 60068-2-3 . CSA. page 36) .CU40N4 ATV 31HU22M2. HD15S6X Hz A A ≤ 1000 (ICC at connection point) for single phase power supply ≤ 5000 (ICC at connection point) for 3-phase power supply ≤ 22000 (ICC at connection point) for 3-phase power supply A Output voltage Maximum connection capacity For drives and tightening torque of the ATV 31H018M2... sampling time: 8 ms Switching: 100. ATV 31KU55N4.. Maximum switching capacity: b on resistive load (cos ϕ = 1 and L/R = 0 ms): 5 A for a 250 V or c 30 V b on inductive load (cos ϕ = 0. contact open on fault.. b AOC: analog current output 0 to 20 mA. AI3. HD15N4. sampling time: 8 ms 10-bit resolution Precision ± 4.. ATV 31HU55N4. power supply terminals. AI2.2 Nm 25 mm2 (AWG 3) 4 Nm Electrical isolation between power and control (inputs. outputs.HU40S6X ATV 31HU55M3X.. power supplies) Short-circuit and overload protection: .25 m maximum with unshielded cable 1 analog output configurable for voltage. HD15M3X.. with impedance 250 Ω AIP: potentiometer reference for ATV31pppA only Max. ATV 31HU22M3X. R1B. maximum load impedance 800 Ω b AOV: analog voltage output 0 to +10V.. b AI1: analog voltage input 0 to +10V.HU40M3X. ATV 31HU55N4. ATV 31H075S6X. minimum load impedance 470 Ω 8-bit resolution Precision ± 1% Linearity ± 0. ATV 31H018M3X.HU40S6X ATV 31HU55M3X..3% Linearity ± 0. 19 V... ATV 31p037N4. HD15S6X Electrical isolation Internal supplies available Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage. Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for c 5 V..One + 24 V supply (min. HU75S6X ATV 31HD11M3X. motor..15% to 240 + 10% 3-phase for ATV 31ppppM3X 380 ..15% to 240 + 10% single phase for ATV 31ppppM2p 200 . ATV 31HU55S6X.5 mm2 (AWG 14) 0.2% of maximum value Use: .4 and L/R = 7 ms): 2 A for a 250 V or c 30 V Max..5% to 60 + 5% Frequency Prospective short-circuit current ICC For drives ATV 31ppppM2 ATV 31H018M3X. current and logic output Configurable relay outputs R1A. impedance 30 kΩ (maximum safe voltage 30 V) b AI3: analog current input X-Y mA by programming X and Y from 0 to 20 mA. current.HU22M2...000 operations 1 relay logic output.15% to 500 + 10% 3-phase for ATV 31ppppN4p 525 . maximum current 100 mA 3 configurable analog inputs AI1.2% Only analog output AOC is configurable as a logic output.8 Nm 6 mm2 (AWG 10) 1. HU75N4. ATV 31H037N4. Max. ATV 31HD11N4.One +10 V (0/+ 8%) supply for the reference potentiometer (2. Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for c 5 V.. impedance 30 kΩ (maximum safe voltage 30 V) b AI2: analog bipolar voltage input ±10 V..HU15M3X braking module and DC bus ATV 31HU11M2.15% to 600 + 10% 3-phase for ATV 31ppppS6X 50 .pU40N4.HU40N4. HU75M3X. sampling time: 8 ms Switching: 100. one “N/C” contact and one “N/O” contact with common point.KD15N4.100 m maximum with shielded cable .2 to 10 kΩ). 30 V) for logic inputs. ATV 31HU55S6X..HD15M3X. maximum current 10 mA .HD15N4.. ATV 31H075S6X.H075M2.HU40M3X.2 Nm 16 mm2 (AWG 6) 2. R2B Presentation: pages 2 to 9 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 11 . sampling time: 8 ms 1 relay logic output.4 and L/R = 7 ms): 2 A for a 250 V or c 30 V Max... max. ATV 31HD11S6X. b AOC: operation as logic output 24 V 20 mA max.. 2. one “N/C” contact. Maximum switching capacity: b on resistive load (cos ϕ = 1 and L/R = 0 ms): 5 A for a 250 V or c 30 V b on inductive load (cos ϕ = 0. R1C R2A..000 operations Configurable analog inputs Analog output configurable for voltage..Characteristics (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Electrical characteristics Power supply Voltage V 200 . 0. possible inhibition of this adaptation (use of braking resistor).2 In b Thermal protection against overheating b Protection against short-circuits between motor phases b Protection against input phase breaks b Protection against motor phase breaks b Protection against overcurrent between output phases and earth b Line supply undervoltage and overvoltage safety circuits b Line supply phase loss safety function.1 receive SDO and 1 transmit SDO v Boot-up messages. 23 and 43 b Broadcasting b Number of addresses: drive address can be configured via the integrated terminal from 1 to 247 b Maximum number of Altivar 31 drives connected: 31 (two 470 Ω master pulldown resistors) b Transmission speed: 4800. 20. period adjustable from 0 to 30 s or continuous. 500 kbps or 1 Mbps Positive logic Negative logic CLI position Maximum I/O connection capacity and tightening torque Acceleration and deceleration ramps Braking to a standstill Main protection and safety features of the drive Motor protection (see page 48) Dielectric strength Between earth and power terminals Between control and power terminals Insulation resistance to earth Signalling Frequency resolution Display units Analog inputs Time constant for reference change Communication Modbus Hz Hz ms CANopen Presentation: pages 2 to 9 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 12 .1 to 100 Hz (calculate (high speed – low speed) /1024) 5 Modbus and CANopen are integrated into the drive and available via an RJ45 connector RS 485 multidrop serial link b Modbus in RTU mode b Services supported: decimal function codes 03.2 PDOs depending on DSP 402 velocity mode . 30 V) Max. b Services supported: v Implicit exchange of Process Data Object . U or customised Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp time if braking capacities exceeded.1 0.Characteristics (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Electrical characteristics (continued) Logic inputs LI 6 programmable logic inputs Impedance 3. current adjustable from 0 to 1. a 3400 V for ATV 31ppppN4. LI3 assigned to reverse and preset speed 3) State 0 if < 5 V or logic input not wired. 06.5 Hz. 16. state 1 if > 11 V State 0 if > 19 V or logic input not wired. a 3600 V for ATV 31ppppS6X > 500 MΩ (electrical isolation) c 500 V for 1 minute 1 red LED on front: LED lit indicates the presence of drive voltage Display coded by four 7-segment display units displaying the CANopen bus status (RUN and ERR). v Explicit exchange of Service Data Object . use the VW3 CANTAP2 adapter. By d. sync and NMT b Number of addresses: drive address can be configured via the integrated terminal from 1 to 127 b Maximum number of Altivar 31 drives connected: 127 b Transmission speed: 10.PDOs can be exchanged between slaves. 50. node guarding and producer and consumer heartbeat. for 3-phase supply Thermal protection integrated in the drive by continuous calculation of the l2t c 2040 V for ATV 31ppppM2 and M3X. sampling time: 4 ms Multiple assignment makes it possible to configure several functions on one input (example: LI1 assigned to forward and preset speed 2. current: 100 mA Max. can be adjusted separately from 0.9 s b S. 19 V.6 Nm Ramp profiles: b linear. state 1 if < 13 V Connection to PLC output (see diagram page 36) 2. 9600 or 19200 bps Used for connecting: b the remote terminal (option) b the PowerSuite software workshop b a PLC b a microprocessor card b a PC To connect the ATV31 drive on the CANopen bus. 250. c 2550 V for ATV 31ppppS6X a 2880 V for ATV 31ppppM2 and M3X.5 kΩ + 24 V internal or 24 V external power supply (min. emergency messages. c 2410 V for ATV 31ppppN4. injection: b by a signal on a programmable logic input b automatically as soon as the estimated output frequency drops to < 0. 125.1 to 999.2 configurable PDOs (data and transmission type) .5 mm2 (AWG 14) 0.c. max. For motor ratings slightly higher than that of the drive.Characteristics.7 to 2 Tn Torque in overspeed at constant power (2) N t t1 1 KM1 0 t t2 KM1 Altivar 31 M t1: deceleration without ramp (freewheel) t2: acceleration with ramp Typical applications: breaking safety circuit at drive outputs.7 1. it is advisable to install a 3-phase choke between the drive and the motors. motor derating is less important (20% instead of 50% at very low frequencies). This use requires deactivation of motor phase loss detection. special uses 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Tn 2. This use requires configuration of automatic catching a spinning load (“catch on the fly”) and activation of the function which manages the presence of a downstream contactor. "bypass" function.25 2 1. If the number of motors in parallel is greater than or equal to 3. Connecting motors in parallel The rating of the drive must be greater than or equal to the sum of the currents of the motors to be connected to the drive. (1) For power ratings ≤ 250 W. Test on a low power motor or without a motor In a testing or maintenance environment the drive can be checked without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of high power drives). check that the current taken does not exceed the continuous output current of the drive.25 0 0 25/30 50/60 75/90 100/120 Hz Torque characteristics (typical curves) The curves below define the available continuous torque and transient overtorque for both force-cooled and self-cooled motors.50 1. In this case. (2) The nominal frequency of the motor and the maximum output frequency can be adjusted between 40 and 500 Hz. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 13 . the motor is controlled and accelerates until it reaches the reference speed smoothly following the acceleration ramp.95 0.50 0.75 1.2 In motor.75 0. Switching the motor at the drive output The drive can be switched when locked or unlocked. The only difference is in the ability of the motor to provide a high continuous torque at less than half the nominal speed 3 Special uses Use with a motor with a different rating to that of the drive The device can supply any motor which has a power rating lower than that for which it is designed.25 1 0. external thermal protection must be provided for each motor using probes or LR2 thermal bimetal overload relays designed for a 1. switching of motors connected in parallel. If the drive is switched on-thefly (drive unlocked). Note: Check the mechanical overspeed characteristics of the selected motor with the manufacturer. Example: breaking of downstream contactor 2 1 4 1 2 3 4 Self-cooled motor: continuous useful torque (1) Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque Transient overtorque 1. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 1.8 5.7 16.5 3.000 531251 3-phase supply voltage: 525…600 V 50/60 Hz.6 16.5 10.8 63.5 20.500 10.5 11 15 0.75 1 1.9 3.4 2.9 6.1 14.500 531249 ATV 31HU40M3X 3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V 50/60 Hz.3 21.2 3 3.700 1.9 8 11 2.5 1.300 1.5 32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 232 269 397 492 ATV 31H037N4 (6) ATV 31H055N4 (6) ATV 31H075N4 (6) ATV 31HU11N4 (6) ATV 31HU15N4 (6) ATV 31HU22N4 (6) ATV 31HU30N4 (6) ATV 31HU40N4 (6) ATV 31HU55N4 (6) ATV 31HU75N4 (6) ATV 31HD11N4 (6) ATV 31HD15N4 (6) 1.9 3.9 55.700 1.6 1 1.100 3.8 7.100 Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz.900 2.4 12.75 1 1.3 18.7 2. prospective line current.8 9.6 71.6 49.4 36.9 2.2 5.55 0.5 1.5 0.5 7.8 2.5 2.75 1.2 0. Above 4 kHz derate the nominal drive current.8 1.9 27.9 9.37 0.7 14.000 10.4 5.2 4.3 10.200 10.5 14.900 6.3 5 5.700 2. (6) The drive can also be ordered complete with potentiometer. prospective current transient line Isc (4) current for 60 s 4 kHz kA A A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. with no additional line choke.4 1.2 4 5.7 8.5 6.5 21 28.5 7.7 4.2 10.9 2. see pages 22 and 23. (5) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications.4 Altivar 31 Max.800 3.3 14. 525-600 V).1 5.7 4.8 6.9 6.5 25.5 7.3 1.7 17.7 1.8 3.55 0.5 10 15 20 2.5 2. Nominal Max.4 8.500 1. in continuous operation.6 4.9 7.9 21.1 18.800 1.2 22 28.25 0.800 1.2 1.4 3.5 4.800 1.75 1.6 13 16.5 0.5 2.2 10.000 11.References 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Drives with heatsink (frequency range from 0.5 Power References (5) dissipated at nominal load W 24 41 46 60 74 90 123 ATV 31H018M2 (6) ATV 31H037M2 (6 ) ATV 31H055M2 (6) ATV 31H075M2 (6) ATV 31HU11M2 (6) ATV 31HU15M2 (6) ATV 31HU22M2 (6) Weight kg 1.800 1.7 15 19 25 33 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 1. U1.75 1.300 1.1 5.9 10.7 4.8 36.5 10 15 20 8 8 6.6 8.5 2 3 – 5 7.0 5.4 9.9 8 11 13.4 5.800 3.2 6. (3) Nominal supply voltages.5 33 36 48 62 94 133 165 257 335 ATV 31H075S6X ATV 31HU15S6X ATV 31HU22S6X ATV 31HU40S6X ATV 31HU55S6X ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HD11S6X ATV 31HD15S6X 1.7 2.3 3.7 37.8 21.3 2.5 to 500 Hz) Motor Line supply Power Line current Apparent indicated on (2) power rating plate (1) at U1 at U2 (3) kW HP A A kVA 0.25 0.500 1.5 4.5 33 54 66 2.7 3.5 11 15 0.1 24.100 3.5 2.200 6.1 9. without EMC filters (7) 0.900 6.5 2 3 3. min.37 0.5 16. add a T to the end of the reference.18 0.1 1.1 1. 380-500 V.7 3.6 7.1 3.3 17 27.3 6.3 5 5.55 0.6 4.3 4.100 6.2 21.g.3 41.500 6. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page 38.500 1.1 1.1 9.37 0.1 1.6 9.4 3.4 10.8 8.5 24.6 21. without EMC filters (7) 0.1 32 40.5 41.8 2.1 9 11 17 22 2.000 (1) These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz.3 27.75 1 1.5 10 15 20 2.5 25.2 5. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz.9 13. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 14 .4 4. (2) Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz. In this case add the letter A to the reference for the drive you require (e.2 2.700 1.5 0. (7) Optional EMC filter.8 6.4 0.2 13.3 3 4. max.5 2 3 – 5 7.700 2.2 3 4 5. for the max.4 8.2 5.2 13.5 11. U2 (200-240 V.6 26.2 2.3 49.8 4.9 6.5 81 99 23 38 43 55 71 86 114 146 180 292 388 477 628 ATV 31H018M3X (6) ATV 31H037M3X (6) ATV 31H055M3X (6) ATV 31H075M3X (6) ATV 31HU11M3X (6) ATV 31HU15M3X (6) ATV 31HU22M3X (6) ATV 31HU30M3X (6) ATV 31HU40M3X (6) ATV 31HU55M3X (6) ATV 31HU75M3X (6) ATV 31HD11M3X (6) ATV 31HD15M3X (6) 1.5 4.7 2.18 0.5 27.6 7.9 0.500 1.1 15.2 48.300 1.2 3 4 5.400 10.5 82.7 33 2.8 6.4 12 16. add line chokes (see page 21).2 4.5 11 15 ATV 31HD15N4A 1 2 3 5 7.900 2.5 3.4 12 16. ATV 31H018M2A).8 2. (4) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table.6 7.2 8.8 46. with integrated EMC filters 531248 ATV 31H037M2 3-phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz.8 16. with integrated EMC filters 531250 ATV 31HU75N4 0.9 19.9 12.3 10.400 6.5 7.4 31.300 1.800 1.2 36.3 3.2 15 18 25 32 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 1.500 11.75 1. 1 1.5 to 500 Hz) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.5 0.8 6.3 2.5 7.300 6. U1. max.9 2.5 4. (5) Nominal supply voltages.5 1. 380-500 V).5 3.75 1 1.800 10.9 3.800 8.5 2. (2) Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz.18 531252 Line supply Line current (2) HP 0.3 32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 ATV 31C037N4 ATV 31C055N4 ATV 31C075N4 ATV 31CU11N4 ATV 31CU15N4 ATV 31CU22N4 ATV 31CU30N4 ATV 31CU40N4 8.2 13.5 2 3 – 5 2.6 1.800 8.2 4.4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.9 7.4 Altivar 31 Apparent Max.4 8.7 4.References (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Enclosed drive 0 Customisable enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.2 5.4 1.37 0.5 Power References (4) dissipated at nominal load W 24 41 46 60 74 90 123 ATV 31C018M2 ATV 31C037M2 ATV 31C055M2 ATV 31C075M2 ATV 31CU11M2 ATV 31CU15M2 ATV 31CU22M2 Weight kg 6. prospective line current.2 8.5 2.4 3.7 14.8 21.5 to 500 Hz) Motor Power indicated on rating plate (1) kW 0.9 13.3 10.9 8 11 2.5 2 3 at U1 A 3 5.75 1.2 4. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz.9 1.6 4. add a T to the end of the reference.700 10.9 12. min.800 8.3 6.8 7.37 0.800 10. for the max.9 6. with no additional line choke.5 1.300 6.5 6. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 15 .55 0. in continuous operation.5 2.6 7.4 3.6 1 1.7 8.2 2.7 3.3 10.700 Ready-assembled enclosed drives (frequency range from 0. (4) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications.2 ATV 31C/Hpppp 3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated EMC filters 0.1 1.3 3.2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1.5 10. Above 4 kHz derate the nominal drive current.800 8.800 8.1 15.55 0.3 5 5.8 2.300 8. Nominal Max.1 5.700 10.5 0.4 5.9 10.8 2.9 at U2 A 2.25 0. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page 38.7 4.2 3 4 0.300 6.75 1. power prospective current transient line Isc (3) current for 60 s 4 kHz KVA kA A A 0.4 12 16.1 9.3 3 4.8 3.8 8.3 18. (3) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table. U2 (200-240 V.2 10.2 2.75 1 1.5 4. add line chokes (see page 21).1 9. (1) These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz.7 2.700 Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated EMC filters 0.8 6. 4 8. U1.8 6.9 at U2 A 2. U2 (200-240 V.5 21 28.8 6.3 21. min.8 2.8 7.300 6.3 3.3 5 5.1 15.25 0.55 0.1 9.800 10.9 8 11 2.1 1.9 10.1 9.5 1.6 7.2 48. Power References (4) power prospective current transient dissipated line Isc (3) current at nominal for load 60 s 4 kHz KVA kA A A W 0. prospective line current.9 7.9 27.5 0.3 10. add line chokes (see page 21).7 3.4 5.5 41.2 5.4 kg 6.5 2 3 – 5 7.6 1 1. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 16 .4 3.5 32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 232 269 397 492 ATV 31K037N4 ATV 31K055N4 ATV 31K075N4 ATV 31KU11N4 ATV 31KU15N4 ATV 31KU22N4 ATV 31KU30N4 ATV 31KU40N4 ATV 31KU55N4 ATV 31KU75N4 ATV 31KD11N4 ATV 31KD15N4 8.9 12.4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.1 1.2 2.5 24 41 46 60 74 90 123 ATV 31K018M2 ATV 31K037M2 ATV 31K055M2 ATV 31K075M2 ATV 31KU11M2 ATV 31KU15M2 ATV 31KU22M2 Weight kW 0.8 3.500 23.5 1. Above 4 kHz derate the nominal drive current.6 4.5 ATV 31Kppppp 7.75 1 1.7 2.300 6.55 0.800 10.5 4.3 18. 380-500 V).5 to 500 Hz) Motor Power indicated on rating plate (1) Line supply Line current (2) Altivar 31 Apparent Max.5 14.3 10.5 25.9 3. max.5 7.8 2.4 3. (4) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications.7 37.5 4.2 3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated filters 0.6 16.700 10.75 1.9 6.7 33 2.9 13.6 49.3 2.2 1.5 10.700 10.2 15 18 25 32 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 1.2 10.2 13.700 16.000 23.18 DF531254 HP 0.2 3 4 5. (3) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table.4 36. in continuous operation. for the max.5 3.3 3 4.37 0.5 ATV 31Kppppp 2.800 8.7 4.5 2.3 17 27. add a T to the end of the reference.800 8.8 8.4 1. (5) Nominal supply voltages.5 11 15 (1) These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz.5 0.75 1 1.75 1.000 0.9 2.700 Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated filters 0.500 16.7 14.References (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Drive kit 0 Drive kit (frequency range from 0.800 8. (2) Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz.8 1.2 4. with no additional line choke. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page 38.5 2 3 at U1 A 3 5.37 DF531255 0.3 6.800 8.300 6.1 5.2 2.800 8.2 8.2 4.300 8. Nominal Max.7 8.5 10 15 20 2.4 12 16.5 6.9 21.7 4.8 21. 500 ATV 31HU22M3X. ATV 31HU15M3X.ATV 31H037M2. ATV 31H055N4.ATV 31H037M2. ATV 31HU75M3X. ATV 31HU15S6X ATV 31HU55N4. Weight kg 0.900 ATV 31HU55N4. ATV 31HD15M3X. ATV 31H075N4. ATV 31H075S6X. VW3 A31815 0. ATV 31H075M2 ATV 31H018M3X. ATV 31HU22S6X. cable fitted with 2 connectors .200 0. ATV 31H055M2. ATV 31HU15S6X ATV 31HU22M2. VW3 A11851 ATV31H055M2. ATV 31H037N4. ATV 31HD15S6X (1) This device allows cables to be connected directly to the drive using conduits or cable glands. ATV 31HU75N4. ATV 31H075M2. ATV 31H075M3X Reference VW3 A31821 Weight kg – ATV 31HU11M2. ATV 31H075N4. ATV 31HU55S6X.Simplified ATV 31 user’s manual and CD-ROM.500 ATV 31HU40M3X. ATV 31H037M3X. VW3 A31812 fixing to the underside of ATV 31H055M2. ATV 31HU15M3X. ATV 31HU15N4.400 ATV H055M3X. ATV H055M3X. ATV 31HU75M3X. ATV 31HU22M3X. ATV 31HU40S6X ATV 31HU55M3X. comprising: . ATV 31HU22M3X. VW3 A31852 ATV 31HU11M3X. ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X. ATV 31HU15N4.terminal. ATV 31HU15M2. ATV 31H075S6X. ATV 31HD15N4.150 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 17 . VW3 A31817 1.a User’s manual for the drives .ATV 31H037M2.a User’s manual for Modbus and CANopen International Technical Manual (ITM) Supplied with the drive Reference – Weight kg – RUN VW3 A31101 CD-ROM DCI CD39811 0. VW3 A31823 ATV 31HU55M3X. ATV 31HU75S6X – – Remote terminal Description For ATV 31 drives of all ratings. width 35 mm For drives Reference ATV 31H018M2. ATV 31HU55S6X. ATV 31HD11S6X. ATV 31HU15S6X For drives Reference 0 Weight kg 0. ATV 31HU15M2.References 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Accessories Plate for mounting on 5 rail Description Plate for mounting on 5 rail. ATV 31HU40N4. ATV 31HU11N4. VW3 A31814 0. VW3 A31811 0.200 ATV 31HD11N4. ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HD11M3X. assembly comprising: . ATV 31HU11N4. VW3 A31816 0. ATV 31H037M3X.400 ATV 31HU11M2. VW3 A31822 ATV 31HU11M3X. ATV 31HU22N4.400 Altivar 28 substitution kit Description Mechanical adapters allowing an ATV 31 to be used in place of an ATV 28 of the same rating (using the same fixing holes) For drives ATV 31H018M2. ATV 31H037N4. ATV H055M3X. ATV 31H075S6X. ATV 31H055N4. ATV 31HU75N4. ATV 31HU15M2.seal and screws for IP 65 mounting on an enclosure door ESC ENT stop reset FWO REV Reference VW3 A31101 Weight kg – Documentation Description .220 UL Type 1 conformity kit (1) Description Mechanical device ATV 31H018M2. ATV 31H037M3X. ATV 31H075M2 the Altivar 31 ATV 31H018M3X. ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M2. ATV 31HU30M3X. ATV 31H018M3X. ATV 31HU15M3X VW3 A31813 0. ATV 31HU30N4. Presentation, characteristics 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Options: braking resistors 0 Presentation The resistor enables the Altivar 31 drive to operate while braking to a standstill or in braked operation, by dissipating the braking energy. Two types of resistor are available: - enclosed model (IP 30 enclosure) designed to comply with EMC regulations and protected by a temperature-controlled switch or thermal relay - non-protected model (IP00) for low power ratings only They are designed for machine applications with high inertia, driving loads, machines with fast cycles. Characteristics References Ambient air temperature Degree of protection of enclosure Resistor protection Temperature-controlled switch °C VW3 A58702 to VW3 A58704 40 IP 00 VW3 A58732 to VW3 A58735 IP 30 VW3 A58736 and VW3 A58737 VW3 A66704 IP 23 None By temperature-controlled switch (1) By thermal relay (2) – 130 ± 5% 260 ± 14% – – a 110 V - 0.3 A a 220 V - 6 A – – c 24 V - 0.01 A – mΩ – 150 50 – The value of the average power that can be dissipated by the resistor in the enclosure Load factor of resistors at 40°C is determined for a braking load factor corresponding to the majority of common applications: - braking for 2 seconds with a torque of 0.6 Tn every 40 seconds - braking for 0.8 second with a torque of 1.5 Tn every 40 seconds The internal circuits for drives used for braking on external resistors are sized for the Load factor of drives following cycles. If they are exceeded, the drive will lock and display a fault. - 1.5 TN for 60 seconds per 140-second cycle - TN continuously (1) The contact must be connected in sequence (used for signalling or for controlling the line contactor). (2) To be ordered separately, 8 A rating. Trip temperature Max. voltage - max. current Min. voltage - min. current Maximum contact resistance °C Load factor and determining the nominal power Speed 0 T t Time Load factor: -- t T The value of the average power that can be dissipated by the resistor in the enclosure at 40°C is determined for a braking load factor corresponding to the majority of common applications. This load factor is defined above. For a specific application (e.g. handling), the nominal resistor power has to be redefined by taking account of the new load factor. t: braking time in s T: cycle time in s Chart 1 Graph of the average power as a function of the braking torque for a load factor. K1 1 60% 40% 20% 0,1 10% 5% 2% 0,01 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 7 6 4 2 0 1 10 100 1000 Chart 2 Permissible resistor overload as a function of time (characteristic curve). K2 0,06 t (s) 0,001 0,1 0,5 0,6 1 1,5 Tb/Tn Example: Motor of power Pm = 4 kW Motor efficiency η = 0.85 Braking torque Tb = 0.6 Tn Braking time t = 10 s Cycle time T = 50 s t - = 20% Load factor Lf = -T Use chart 1 to determine the coefficient K1 corresponding to a braking torque of 0.6 Tn and a load factor of 20%. K1 = 0.06 Use chart 2 to determine the coefficient K2 corresponding to a braking time of 10 seconds. K2 = 7 The nominal resistor power (Pn) must be greater than: 1 ö 1 3 Pn = Pm × K1 × η æ 1 + ------------------ = 4,10 × 0,06 × 0,85 æ 1 + -----------------ö = 350W è è K2 × Lfø 7 × 0,2ø 18 References 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Options: braking resistors 0 For drives Min. resistor value (1) Ω 40 40 27 40 40 27 80 80 54 54 96 64 55 36 44 25 25 16 40 40 27 40 40 27 80 80 54 54 25 25 16 55 36 25 16 55 36 29 19 34 23 16 20 24 8 5 Ohmic value Average power available at 40°C(2) W 32 50°C W 28 Reference Weight Ω 100 kg VW3 A58702 0.600 Non-protected braking resistors ATV 31H/C/K018M2, ATV 31H/C/K037M2, ATV 31H/C/K055M2, ATV 31H/C/K075M2 ATV 31H/C/KU11M2, ATV 31H/C/KU15M2, ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, ATV 31H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X, ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X, ATV 31H/C/K037N4, ATV 31H/C/K055N4, ATV 31H/C/K075N4, ATV 31H/C/KU11N4, ATV 31H/C/KU15N4, ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H075S6X ATV 31HU15S6X, ATV31HU22S6X ATV 31H/C/KU30N4, ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31HU40S6X ATV 31H/C/KU22M2, ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31HU30M3X 531231 100 40 35 VW3 A58703 0.850 68 32 28 VW3 A58704 0.600 Protected braking resistors ATV 31H/C/K018M2, ATV 31H/C/K037M2, ATV 31H/C/K055M2, ATV 31H/C/K075M2, ATV 31H/C/KU11M2, ATV 31H/C/KU15M2, ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, ATV 31H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X, ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X, ATV 31H/C/K037N4, ATV 31H/C/K055N4, ATV 31H/C/K075N4, AATV 31H/C/KU11N4, ATV 31H/C/KU15N4, ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H/C/KU22M2, ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31H/C/KU30N4, ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31H/C/KU30N4, ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31H/KU55N4, ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31HU55S6X ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31H/KD11N4, ATV 31H/KD15N4 ATV 31HD11S6X, ATV 31HD15S6X ATV 31HU55M3X, ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31HD11M3X, ATV 31HD15M3X VW3 A5873p 100 32 28 VW3 A58732 2.000 VW3 A58702 68 32 28 VW3 A58733 2.000 531232 100 60 40 80 35 69 VW3 A58734 VW3 A58735 2.000 3.400 28 200 173 VW3 A58736 5.100 14 10 400 1000 346 866 VW3 A58737 VW3 A66704 (3) 6.100 17.000 (1) Depends on the drive rating. (2) Power that can be dissipated by the resistor at the maximum temperature of 115°C, corresponding to a maximum temperature rise of 75°C in a 40°C environment. (3) The various ohmic values are obtained as a function of the connection, described in the resistor instructions. 19 Presentation, characteristics 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Options: line chokes 0 Presentation These chokes provide improved protection against overvoltages on the line supply and reduce harmonic distortion of the current produced by the drive. The recommended chokes are used to limit the line current. They have been developed to conform to standard EN 50178 (VDE 0160 level 1 high energy overvoltages on the line supply). The values of the chokes are defined for a voltage drop between 3% and 5% of the nominal line voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque. The use of line chokes is recommended in particular under the following circumstances: b Line supply with significant disturbance from other equipment (interference, overvoltages) b Line supply with voltage imbalance between phases > 1.8 % of nominal voltage b Drive supplied with power by a line with very low impedance (in the vicinity of power transformers 10 times more powerful than the drive rating) The prospective short-circuit current at the point of connection of the drive must not exceed the maximum value indicated in the tables of references. The use of line chokes allows connection on the following networks: - Max. Isc 22 kA for 200/240 V - Max. Isc 65 kA for 380/500 V and 525/600 V b Installation of a large number of frequency converters on the same line b Reduction of overload in cos ϕ correction capacitors, if the installation has a power factor correction unit Type of line choke VZ1 L00 VZ1 L00 VZ1 L01 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 4M010 7UM50 8UM20 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 EN 50178 (VDE 0160 level 1 high energy overvoltages on the line supply) Between 3 and 5% of the nominal line voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque. Choke Terminals mH A W IP 00 IP 20 10 4 17 Characteristics Conformity to standards Voltage drop Degree of protection Value of choke Nominal current Loss 5 7 20 2 18 30 10 4 45 4 10 65 2 16 75 IP 10 1 30 90 0.5 60 80 IP 00 0.3 100 – 20 References 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Options: line chokes 0 Altivar 31 Single phase or 3-phase Line current without choke at U min. at U max. A A 3.0 5.3 6.8 8.9 12.1 15.8 21.9 2.1 3.8 4.9 6.4 8.5 11.1 14.9 19.1 24.2 36.8 46.8 63.5 82.1 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.9 6.4 8.9 10.9 13.9 21.9 27.7 37.2 48.2 2.5 4.4 5.8 7.5 10.2 13.3 18.4 1.9 3.3 4.2 5.6 7.4 9.6 13 16.6 21.1 32 40.9 55.6 71.9 1.7 2.2 2.7 3.7 4.8 6.7 8.3 10.6 16.5 21 28.4 36.8 Choke Line current with Reference choke at U min. at U max. A A 2.1 3.9 5.2 7.0 10.2 13.4 19.2 1 1.9 2.5 3.3 4.8 6.4 9.2 12.3 16.1 21.7 29 41.6 55.7 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.6 3.4 5 6.5 8.5 11.7 15.4 22.5 29.6 1.8 3.3 4.3 5.9 8.6 11.4 16.1 0.9 1.6 2.2 2.9 4.2 5.6 8 10.7 14 19 25.2 36.5 48.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 2 2.6 4.1 5.2 6.6 9.3 12.1 18.1 23.3 1.4 2.3 3.6 5.8 7.5 10.7 14.4 20.6 VZ1 L004M010 VZ1 L007UM50 VZ1 L018UM20 Weight kg 0.630 0.880 1.990 Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V (1) 50/60 Hz ATV 31H/C/K018M2 ATV 31H/C/K037M2 ATV 31H/C/K055M2 ATV 31H/C/K075M2 ATV 31H/C/KU11M2 ATV 31H/C/KU15M2 ATV 31H/C/KU22M2 803687 3-phase supply voltage: 200…240 V (1) 50/60 Hz ATV 31H018M3X ATV 31H037M3X ATV 31H055M3X ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X ATV 31HU15M3X ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X ATV 31H/C/K037N4 ATV 31H/C/K055N4 ATV 31H/C/K075N4 ATV 31H/C/KU11N4 ATV 31H/C/KU15N4 ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H/C/KU30N4 ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31H/KU55N4 ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31H/KD11N4 ATV 31H/KD15N4 VW3 A66501 1.500 VW3 A66502 VW3 A66503 VW3 A66504 3.000 3.500 6.000 VW3 A6650p VW3 A66505 11.000 3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V (1) 50/60 Hz VW3 A66501 1.500 VW3 A66502 3.000 VW3 A66503 VW3 A66504 3.500 6.000 3-phase supply voltage: 525…600 V (1) 50/60 Hz ATV 31H075S6X 2.5 2.4 1.4 ATV 31HU15S6X 4.4 4.2 2.4 ATV 31HU22S6X 5.8 5.6 3.8 ATV 31HU40S6X 9.7 9.3 6 ATV 31HU55S6X 14.7 14.1 7.8 ATV 31HU75S6X 19.3 18.5 11 ATV 31HD11S6X 25.4 24.4 15 ATV 31HD15S6X 33.2 31.8 21.1 (1) Nominal supply voltage: U min.…U max. VW3 A66501 1.500 VW3 A66502 VW3 A66503 VW3 A66504 3.000 3.500 6.000 21 5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz 1 gn peak from 13 to 150 Hz 15 gn for 11 ms 240 + 10% 240 + 10% 500 + 10% 600 + 10% 22 . They can be installed at the side of the product in the case of ATV 31C and K drives. The efficiency of additional filters on this type of network also depends on the nature of the impedance between neutral and earth and is therefore unpredictable. The additional filters enable the drives to meet more stringent requirements: these filters are designed to reduce conducted emissions on the line supply below the limits of standards EN 55011 class A (1) or EN 55022 class B. annex D2. characteristics 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Options: additional EMC input filters 0 Presentation Function The Altivar 31 has built-in radio interference input filters to meet EMC "product" standards for variable speed drives IEC/EN 61800-3 and to comply with the European EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) directive. They act as supports for the drives and are fixed to them via tapped holes.10…+ 60 . derate the current by 1% per additional 100 m) 1. The standard IEC 61800-3. Characteristics Conformity to standards Degree of protection Maximum relative humidity Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Vibration resistance Shock resistance Max.1. nominal voltage Operation Storage Without derating Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 50/60 Hz single phase 50/60 Hz 3-phase V V °C °C m EN 133200 IP 21 and IP 41 on upper part 93% without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 68-2-3 .Presentation. one solution is to insert an isolation transformer and to connect locally to the machine on a TN or TT network. Use according to the type of network Use of these additional filters is only possible on TN (neutral connection) and TT (neutral to earth) type networks. These additional filters are installed underneath ATV 31H drives. indicates that on IT (impedance earthed or isolated neutral) networks the filters can randomise the operation of insulation monitors. If a machine is to be installed on an IT network.25…+ 70 1000 (above this. These limits are given as examples only as they vary depending on the interference capacity of the motors and the cables used. 23 . (3) Maximum earth leakage current at 50 Hz. (4) By heat dissipation. If motors are connected in parallel. (2) In: Nominal filter current. it is the total length that should be taken into account.References 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Options: additional EMC input filters 0 For drives Reference Filter Maximum length of In shielded cable (2) EN 55011 EN 55022 class A class B (1) (2) m m A 20 9 Il (3) Loss (4) Reference Weight mA 100 W – VW3 A31401 kg – Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz ATV 31H/C/K018M2 50 ATV 31H/C/K037M2 ATV 31H/C/K055M2 ATV 31H/C/K075M2 ATV 31H/C/KU11M2 50 ATV 31H/C/KU15M2 ATV 31H/C/KU22M2 50 ATV 31H018M3X ATV 31H037M3X ATV 31H055M3X ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X ATV 31HU15M3X ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X 5 20 20 – 16 22 7 150 80 7 – VW3 A31403 VW3 A31405 – – – 3-phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz – VW3 A31402 5 – 15 15 – VW3 A31404 – 5 5 5 – – – 25 47 83 35 45 15 – – – VW3 A31406 VW3 A31407 VW3 A31408 – – – 3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V 50/60 Hz ATV 31H/C/K037N4 50 20 15 15 – VW3 A31404 – ATV 31H/C/K055N4 ATV 31H/C/K075N4 ATV 31H/C/KU11N4 ATV 31H/C/KU15N4 ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 50 20 25 35 – VW3 A31406 – ATV 31H/C/KU30N4 ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31H/KU55N4 50 20 47 45 – VW3 A31407 – ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31H/KD11N4 50 20 49 45 – VW3 A31409 – ATV 31H/KD15N4 (1) The filter selection tables show the length limits for the shielded cables connecting the motors to the drives for a switching frequency of 2 to 16 kHz. it is possible to: b Limit the dv/dt at the motor terminals (500 to 1500 V/µs).. ferrite suppressors should be fitted to each motor cable for certain drive ratings supplied with a single phase or 3-phase 200 V supply. 24 . y 100 – IP 20 LC filter cells VW3 A6641p 2 or 4 y 100 y 200 IP 00 Motor chokes VW3 A6650p 4 y 100 – IP 20 Drive switching frequency Length of motor cable Shielded cables Unshielded cables Degree of protection kHz m m 12 y 50 y 100 IP 00 (1) Filter performance is ensured if the cable lengths between the motor and the drive given in the above table are not exceeded.Presentation. characteristics 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Options: output filters and motor chokes 0 Presentation By inserting an output filter between the drive and the motor.5 . Principle LR filter cell LC filter cell This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes and 3 resistors. If a cable longer than that recommended is used. the cable length must include all tap-offs. the filters may overheat. Altivar 31 M1 3 C Altivar 31 Contactor M1 3 Characteristics (1) LR filter cells (2) VW3 A5845p 0. (2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office for frequencies greater than 4 kHz or cables longer than 100 m. for cables longer than 50 m b Filter interference caused by opening a contactor placed between the filter and the motor b Reduce the motor earth leakage current When using a downstream contactor between the drive and the motor. LC filter U1 Altivar 31 V1 W1 Altivar 31 V1 W1 M1 3 C C Motor choke Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening For standard motor cables longer than 100 m (50 m for shielded cables). 4 max. a choke can be used to limit overvoltages at the motor terminals.. For an application with several motors connected in parallel. LR filter U1 This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes and 3 capacitors. ATV 31H/KU55N4 ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31H/KD11N4 ATV 31HD11S6X ATV 31HD15S6X ATV 31H/KD15N4 ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X For drives ATV 31H018M2 ATV 31H037M2. ATV 31H075M3 75 16 VW3 A66503 3.500 Motor chokes For drives Loss W 65 Nominal Reference current A 10 VW3 A66502 Weight kg 3.000 ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H/C/KU30N4 ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31HU40S6X. ATV 31HU55S6X ATV 31H/C/KU22M2.400 220 33 VW3 A58453 12.500 90 30 VW3 A66504 6. ATV 31H018M3 ATV 31H037M3 ATV 31H055M2.500 LC filter cells For drives ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X Reference VW3 A66412 Weight kg 3. ATV 31H075M2 ATV 31HU11M2.000 16. ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X.400 180 16 VW3 A58452 7.References 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Options: output filters and motor chokes 0 LR filter cells 521425 For drives Loss W 150 VW3 A58451 ATV 31H/C/K018M2 ATV 31H/C/K037M2 ATV 31H/C/K055M2 ATV 31H/C/K075M2 ATV 31H/C/KU11M2 ATV 31H/C/KU15M2 ATV 31H018M3X ATV 31H037M3X ATV 31H055M3X ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X ATV 31HU15M3X ATV 31H/C/K037N4 ATV 31H/C/K055N4 ATV 31H/C/K075N4 ATV 31H/C/KU11N4 ATV 31H/C/KU15N4 ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H/C/KU30N4 ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31H075S6X ATV 31HU15S6X ATV 31HU22S6X ATV 31HU40S6X ATV 31HU55S6X ATV 31H/C/KU22M2 ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31H/KU55N4 ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31HD11S6X ATV 31HD15S6X Nominal Reference current A 10 VW3 A58451 Weight kg 7.000 80 – 60 100 VW3 A66505 VW3 A66506 11.000 Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening Sold in lots of 3 3 3 Unit reference VW3 A31451 VW3 A31452 VW3 A31453 Weight kg – – – 25 . ATV 31HU15M2 ATV 31H055M3. CANopen Modbus Connections via splitter blocks and RJ45 connectors Connections via junction boxes 1 2 2 3 4 4 3 4 3 5 4 3 4 1 6 4 6 5 2 1 5 3 4 4 6 7 ATV 31 ATV 31 ATV 31 1 2 3 4 PLC (1) CANopen trunk cable CANopen tap junction VW3 CAN TAP2 CANopen drop cable VW3 CAN CA RRpp 1 PLC (1) 1 2 Modbus cable depending on the type of 2 controller or PLC 3 3 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 4 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 Rpp 4 5 5 Line terminators VW3 A8 306 RC 6 Modbus T-junction boxes 6 VW3 A8 306 TFpp (with cable) 7 PLC (1) Modbus cable depending on the type of controller or PLC Modbus cables TSX CSAp00 T-junction box TSX SCA 50 Subscriber socket TSX SCA 62 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 D30 Connections via screw terminals In this case. depending on the type of module. control and monitoring functions. use a Modbus drop cable VW3 A8 306 D30 and line terminators VW3 A8 306 DRC. 4 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 5 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 Rpp 6 Line terminator VW3 A8 306 RC ATV 31 (1) Please consult our specialist catalogues. VW3 P07 306 R10 or VW3 A8 306 D30. 26 . 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 ATV 31 6 5 5 5 1 To network 2 Communication modules 3 Cables VW3 A8 306 Rpp. control and monitoring functions.Presentation 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Communication options 0 Modbus and CANopen communication buses The Altivar 31 can be connected directly to Modbus and CANopen buses by means of an RJ45 connector. The communication function provides access to the drive’s configuration. Other communication buses The Altivar 31 can also be connected to the following networks via a module (bridge or gateway): b Ethernet b Fipio b Profibus DP b DeviceNet The communication function provides access to the drive’s configuration. adjustment. adjustment. which supports both protocols. 3 m) VW3 A8 306 TF03 With integrated cable (1 m) VW3 A8 306 TF10 Connecting cables Description Cables for CANopen bus Cables for Modbus bus Length m 0.3 m 10 m 3 3 Connectors 2 RJ45 connectors 2 RJ45 connectors Reference Weight kg VW3 CAN CA RR03 0.240 27 .150 0.200 – – 563029 TSX SCA 62 With integrated cable (0.050 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 100 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 200 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 500 – – – 500 Other communication buses Description 174 CEV 300 20 563031 Cables to be connected VW3 A8 306 D30 Reference Ethernet/Modbus bridge with 1 x Ethernet 10baseT port (RJ45) Fipio/Modbus gateway (3) DeviceNet/Modbus gateway (3) Profibus DP/Modbus gateway Parameters set using standard Profibus DP configurator (3) Weight kg 174 CEV 300 20 (2) 0. RC line terminator To be connected using cable VW3 A8 306 D30 Modbus subscriber socket 2 female 15-way SUB-D connectors and 2 screw terminals.240 0.3 1 3 Cables for 1 Profibus gateway LA9 P307 RS 485 double 100 shielded twisted pair cables 200 563030 1 RJ45 connector VW3 A8 306 D30 and one end stripped 1 RJ45 connector and 1 male VW3 A8 306 15-way SUB-D connector for TSX SCA 62 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R03 2 RJ45 connectors 2 RJ45 connectors 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R10 VW3 A8 306 R30 VW3 P07 306 R10 0.570 LU9 GC3 VW3 A8 306 RC VW3 A8 306 R VW3 A8 306 DRC VW3 A8 306 DR 0. 0.150 0.520 TSX SCA 50 Modbus junction box 3 screw terminals.150 0.200 0. C = 1 nF R = 150 Ω Modbus T-junction boxes TSX SCA 62 0.050 0.240 563032 LUF P1 LA9 P307 Profibus DP/Modbus gateway VW3 A8 306 Rpp LUF P7 Parameters set using ABC Configurator software (3) (1) Sold in lots of 2. RC line terminator To be connected using cable VW3 A8 306 Modbus splitter block 10 RJ45 connectors and 1 screw terminal Modbus line For RJ45 R = 120 Ω. (2) Please consult our catalogue "Premium automation platform".References 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Communication options 0 Modbus and CANopen communication buses Connection accessories Description CANopen bus junction box 563028 Reference VW3 CAN TAP2 TSX SCA 50 Weight kg – 0. (3) Please consult our catalogue "Soft starters and variable speed drives".200 0.500 VW3 A8 306 Rpp VW3 A8 306 Rpp VW3 P07 306 R10 LUF P1 LUF P9 LA9 P307 0.050 0.500 0. C = 1 nF terminators connector (1) R = 150 Ω For screw terminals R = 120 Ω.240 0.050 VW3 CAN CA RR1 0.200 0.500 0. In this case. 531439 Functions The PowerSuite software workshop can be used for preparing. PowerSuite PC and Pocket PC configuration files are both the same format. The software associated with the Altivar 31 has been enhanced to include the following new functions: oscilloscope function. CD-ROM.0.connection to a single starter or drive (point-to-point connection) .using a communication option card VW3 A58310 (for Altivar 38. It can be used: b stand alone to prepare and store starter or drive configuration files b connected to the starter or drive to: v configure v adjust v monitor (except for Altivar 11 drives) v control (except for Altivar 11 drives) v transfer and compare configuration files between PowerSuite and the starter or drive The software workshop has online contextual help. German. creation of a user menu. 800 MHz. 128 MB RAM v SVGA or higher definition monitor b The PowerSuite for Pocket PC software workshop is compatible with Pocket PCs equipped with a Windows for Pocket PC 2002 operating system and an ARM or XSCALE processor. programming. Performance tests for version V2.using an Ethernet-Modbus bridge 174 CEV 300 20 .connection to a set of starters or drives (multidrop connection) b The PowerSuite for PC software workshop can also be connected to an Ethernet network (Please consult our catalogue "Soft starters and variable speed drives). Microsoft Windows® NT4. for PC or Pocket PC. PowerSuite with PC screen Oscilloscope function Connections Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives are equipped with a Modbus RS485 terminal port (except for Altivar 68 drives). hard disk with 300 MB available. Two types of connection are possible: . This single program is an easy-to-use interface for configuring Altistart and Tesys model U starters and all Altivar drives in a Microsoft Windows® environment in five languages (English. Italian and Spanish). Microsoft Windows® Me. PowerSuite can be used to generate configuration files which can then be: b saved to hard disk. parameter name customization. etc. b The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the terminal port via the serial port on the PC or Pocket PC. 58 and 58F drives only) 531440 Hardware and software environment b The PowerSuite for PC software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and configurations: v Microsoft Windows® 95 OSR2-98 SE.0 of the PowerSuite software workshop have been carried out on the following Pocket PCs: v Hewlett Packard® Jornada series 560 v Compaq® IPAQ series 3800 and 3900 PowerSuite with Pocket PC screen 28 . the starters and drives can be accessed: .X SP5. setting up and maintaining Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives. b printed b exported to office automation software b exchanged between a PC and a Pocket PC using standard synchronization software. Microsoft Windows® XP v Pentium III. configuration locking using a password. is designed for setting up Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives. etc. floppy disk.Presentation 0 PowerSuite software workshop 0 The PowerSuite software workshop. French. Microsoft Windows® 2000. 20 – Incompatible products Compatible products and software versions Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshop with Pocket PCs Pocket PC PowerSuite software version Hewlett Packard® Jornada 525.6 m connecting cables with 2 x RJ 45 connectors .100 VW3 A8101 VW3 A8105 0. VW3 A8105 u V 1. 548 not compatible from V 2.Contains the software for PC and Pocket PC in English.50 and Ethernet/ Modbus bridge u V 1.1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 68 drives . with one 4-way male connector and 1 RJ 45 connector Caution: The serial synchronization cable must be ordered separately from the supplier of the Pocket PC.0 and Ethernet/ Modbus bridge u V 2.0.30 u V 1.50 and EthernetModbus bridge u V 1. German. VW3 A8104. Italian and Spanish along with the technical documentation and the ABC configurator program.1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 58.1 PowerSuite CD-ROM .30 Compaq® IPAQ series 3800 and 3900 29 . ATV 58F u V 1. VW3 A8105 u V 1. German.PowerSuite software workshop 0 PowerSuite software workshop for PC and Pocket PC Description 563019 Reference VW3 A8101 PowerSuite for PC kit comprising: .300 VW3 A8102 (1) To find out about the latest available version. Italian and Spanish along with the technical documentation and the ABC configurator program.1 converter marked “RS 232/RS 485 PPC” with one 9-way male SUB-D connector and 1 RJ 45 connector . ATV 58F and ATV 38 drives .Contains the software for PC and Pocket PC in English.50 PowerSuite software workshop with Ethernet link for PC Kit and CD-ROM VW3 A8101.350 563020 VW3 A8111 0.0 u V 2.400 VW3 A8104 0.40 u V 1. please consult your Regional Sales Office.40 u V 1.40 u V 1. Compatibility Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshop with the Controller starter starters and variable speed drives TeSys model U Soft start/ soft stop unit ATS 48 Drives ATV 11 ATV28 ATV 31 ATV 38 ATV 58.1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 58.1 converter marked “RS 232/RS 485 PC” with one 9-way female SUB-D connector and 1 RJ 45 connector .1 Pocket PC connection kit PowerSuite CD-ROM .50 u V 1. Weight kg 0.0 ATV 68 PowerSuite software workshop with serial link for PC Kit and CD-ROM VW3 A8101. for ATV 11 drives.0 u V 1.400 VW3 A8102 0. VW3 A8104.0. with one 4-way male connector and 1 RJ 45 connector Pocket PC connection kit comprising: . French.1 PC connection kit PowerSuite for Pocket PC kit comprising: .40 u V 1.0 Hewlett Packard® Jornada series 560 u 1. French.2 x 3 m connecting cables with 2 x RJ 45 connectors . ATV 58F and ATV 38 drives .50 and Ethernet V2 communication card or bridge – PowerSuite software workshop for Pocket PC Kit and CD-ROM VW3 A8102.1 converter.20 u V 2.2 x 0.0. PowerSuite upgrade CD-ROM .100 VW3 A8106 0. VW3 A8104.0.1 PowerSuite CD-ROM . for ATV 11 drives.40 u V 1. PC connection kit comprising: .0 u V 1. VW3 A8105 – u V 1.30 u 1.30 – u V 1.1 converter. 545. 5 2xM5 screw ATV 31H 018M3X. U40S6X b c d G H J 143 130 49 93 121. ATV 31HU75M3X/M3XA. 037M3X 055M3X. ATV 31HU75N4/N4A. 140 HUp0M3X U22N4 to U40N4 U22S6X.5 4xM4 M5 References: pages 14 to 17 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 8 (1) = 160 = 17 210 5 8 (1) 190 = 225 245 (1) Only for drives whose reference ends in A. ATV 31H075S6X to ATV 31HU40S6X Ø ATV 31H a U1pM3X 105 U1pM2. ATV 31HU1pM3X/M3XA to ATV 31HU4pM3X/M3XA. U15S6X U22M2. ATV 31HU55N4/N4A. ATV 31HD1pN4/N4A.Dimensions 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 ATV 31H0ppM3X/MXA. ATV 31H0ppM2/M2A Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) 2xØ5 121.5 145 5 18.5 295 2xM5 screw 75 = 27. ATV 31HUppM2/M2A.5 20. ATV 31H0ppN4/N4A to ATV 31HU40N4/N4A.5 4x5 60 (1) Only for drives whose reference ends in A. ATV 31HU55S6X.5 5 K H b J c a d M5 4xM4 Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) 2xM5 screw 8 (1) = G = 184 150 48 126 157 (1) Only for drives whose reference ends in A. U22M3X 105 037N4 to U15N4 U75S6X.5 2x5 2xM5 screw 6. 075M3X 018M2. ATV 31HD1pM3X/M3XA. 075M2 c 120 130 130 140 8 (1) c = = 72 50 M5 4xM4 Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) K Ø 16. ATV 31HU55M3X/M3XA. ATV 31HD1pS6X Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) 4xØ6 7 329. 037M2 055M2. ATV 31HU75S6X 4xØ5 232 170 180 4xM4 M5 (1) Only for drives whose reference ends in A.5 5 143 150 49 93 121. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 30 75 .5 2x5 16. ATV 31CU11N4. ATV 31CU30N4.5 340 208 318 212 230 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 31 . ATV 31CU40N4 4xØ5. ATV 31CU22N4. ATV 31C0ppN4.5 297 192 277 197 215 ATV 31CU22M2. ATV 31CU15N4 4xØ5.Dimensions 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Enclosed drive 0 ATV 31C0ppM2 4xØ5.5 240 163 218 192 210 ATV 31CU11M2. ATV 31CU15M2. UppN4 265 234 380 Note: product supplied with drilling template. b 600 700 b1 444 546 c 343 267 E 12 13 F 155 180 G 250 280 H 49 39 J 500 600 K 180 150 K1 0 180 Ø 12 x 6 14 x 6 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 32 K K1 b1 J b K H .Dimensions 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Drive kit 0 ATV 31KpppM2. U75N4 400 340 334 D11N4. 0ppN4. D15N4 450 370 386 Note: product supplied with drilling template. ATV 31KD1pN4/pM2 Mounting c a 15 8xØ8 a2 35 b1 H E Ø H 35 7 19 a1 15 30 G 30 F F 19 ATV 31K a a1 a2 U55N4. ATV 31K0ppN4. b1 240 297 340 c 153 186 209 c1 123 127 134 E 10 1 1 F 117 115 122.5 G 234 230 245 H 260 317 360 K 130 158. ATV 31KU22N4.5 180 ATV 31KU55N4. ATV 31KUp0N4 Mounting a a1 E 10 K H b K c1 c F G F G 7xØ5.5 ATV 31K a a1 b 0ppM2 254 214 280 U1pM2. ATV 31KU75N4. U1 pN4 250 219 337 U22M2. Dimensions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Plates for mounting on 5 rail VW3 A11851 VW3 A31852 143.9 77.5 40 144 105 UL NEMA Type 1 conformity kit VW3 A31811 to VW3 A31817 (1) b (2) VW3 ∆b A31812 77 A31813 and A31814 107 A31815 138 A31816 179 A31817 244 (1) Drive (2) Kit for VW3 A3181p Remote terminal VW3 A31101 Mounting 55.6 24 52 4xØ3.6 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59 33 .6 37.5 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Ø36 79. 5 61 = = 85 = = VW3 A58735 A58736.Dimensions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Bare braking resistors VW3 A58702 and A58704 2-wire output.5 = a = = 8.5 m 4xØ5 6 154 170 30 = 40 60 = 36 212 6 = = 62 Protected braking resistors VW3 A58732 to VW3 A58734 VW3 A58735 to VW3 A58737 c 7. length 0.5 = c 61 167 410 540 370 4xØ13 350 380 384 480 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 b Functions: pages 44 to 59 34 .75 H H 320 415 332 310 195 2xØ5 3xØ5. A58737 VW3 A66704 a 163 156 b 340 434 77.5 m VW3 A58703 2-wire output. length 0. 5 107 122 181 H 42 62 62 90 105 100 Ø 6x9 6 x 12 6 x 12 6 x 12 6 x 12 11 x 22 VZ1 L004M010 L007UM50 L018UM20 a 60 60 85 b 100 100 120 c 80 95 105 G 50 50 70 H 44 60 70 Ø 4x9 4x9 5 x 11 VW3 A66501 A66502 A66503 A66504 A66505 A66506 Additional EMC input filters: Mounting of filter underneath the drive Mounting of filter adjacent to drive Ø = Ø b1 b b = H c = G a a 72 105 140 180 245 b 185 185 225 275 365 = a c VW3 A31401.5 80. A31404 A31405.5 212 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 b References: pages 14 to 17 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 b 4xØ b 35 .5 340 239 c 123 G a G 150 H 315 444 Ø 7 7 VW3 A31451 A31452 A31453 a 33. A31402 A31403.5 139. A31406 A31407 A31408. A31409 b1 – – – – – c 50 60 60 60 60 G 60 93 126 160 295 H 121.5 19 c 33 22.5 157 210 225 Ø 2 x M4 2 x M4 4 x M4 4 x M4 4 x M5 Output filters VW3 A58451 to VW3 A58453 Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening VW3 A31451 to VW3 A31452 c Ø a H c VW3 A58451 A58452 A58453 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 a b 169.5 33 30 b 33 21.5 19 Ø 13 9 6 Functions: pages 44 to 59 467.Dimensions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Single phase chokes VZ1 Lppppppp 3-phase chokes VW3 A66501 to VW3 A66506 Ø b H c G a 8xØ H c c1 G G1 a a 100 130 130 155 180 275 b 135 155 155 170 210 210 c 55 85 85 115 125 130 c1 60 90 90 135 165 160 G 40 60 60 75 85 105 G1 60 80.5 121. Note: All terminals are located at the bottom of the drive. (3) Shared connection of the logic inputs depends on the position of a switch. see diagrams below. contactors. such as relays. S2 XB2 B or XA2 B pushbuttons T1 100 VA transformer 220 V secondary Q2 GV2 L rated at twice the nominal primary current of T1 Q2 GB2 CB05 Examples of recommended circuit diagrams Logic input switches “Source” position 0V “Sink” position 24 V CLI position with PLC transistor outputs COM COM CLI CLI LI1 LI1 AOC output Wired as logic output ATV 31 control terminals AOC + 24 V COM LI1 LI1 24 V 0V PLC 0V PLC 24 V 24 V relay 10 mA 2-wire control 3-wire control Analog voltage inputs ± 10 V external ATV 31 control terminals ± 10 V external ATV 31 control terminals Analog current input 0-20 mA. please consult our specialist catalogue). (2) Fault relay contacts.Schemes.2 to 10 kΩ ± 10 V Source 0-20 mA 4-20 mA X-Y mA Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Functions: pages 44 to 59 36 0V LI1 LI1 LI2 LIx LIx 0V AOC AOV PC/- AI2 AI1 AI3 PB P0 W U V . Compatible components (for full references. Fit interference suppressors to all inductive circuits near the drive or connected on the same circuit. Code Description Q1 GV2 L or Compact NS (see pages 40 to 43) KM1 LC1 ppp + LA4 DA2U (see pages 40 to 43) S1. combinations 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 ATV 31ppppM3X. 4-20 mA. X-Y mA ATV 31 control terminals + 24 V + 24 V ATV 31 control terminals ATV 31 control terminals AI1 0V AI3 AI2 0V LI1: Forward LIx: Reverse LI1: Stop LI2: Forward LIx: Reverse + 10 V Speed reference potentiometer 2. fluorescent lighting. etc. solenoid valves. ATV 31ppppS6X 3-phase power supply ATV 31ppppM2 Single phase power supply 1 3 1 3 5 Q1 2 4 6 S2 1 Q3 2 KM1 A2 Q1 2 4 6 S2 1 Q3 2 KM1 A2 5 1 Q2 2 3 4 5 Q2 6 A1 R1A R1C 1 Q2 2 3 1 3 5 4 5 Q2 6 T1 S1 A1 T1 S1 A1 A1 R1A R1C 1 3 KM1 2 4 6 KM1 13 14 KM1 2 4 KM1 13 14 (1) (3) (2) (1) (3) (2) R1C R1A R1B R2C R2A L1 L2 LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6 + 24 + 24 R1C L1 L2 L3 R1A R1B LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 R2C R2A LI6 CLI PA/+ PA/+ COM + 10 COM + 10 CLI A1 A1 AOC AOV PC/- AI2 AI1 AI3 PB P0 W U V W1 W1 U1 U1 V1 V1 X-Y mA Braking resistor Reference potentiometer SZ1 RV1202 X-Y mA Braking resistor Reference potentiometer SZ1 RV1202 M 3 0 ± 10 V M 3 0 ± 10 V (1) Line choke (single phase or 3-phase). For remote signalling of drive status. ATV 31ppppN4. use cables with a small cross-section (0. b Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable. move the cable tag to disconnect the filter. 6. Use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-linear loads. Shielded cable for connecting the control/command wiring. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Functions: pages 44 to 59 37 . Ground screw for the motor cable with low ratings. Note: The HF equipotential ground connection between the drive. to be fitted on it (machine ground) Altivar 31 Non-shielded power supply wires or cable Non-shielded wires for the output of the safety relay contacts. it should be mounted beneath the drive and connected directly to the line supply via an unshielded cable.g. The shielding must be clamped tightly enough to the metal plate to ensure good contact. b Use shielded cables with the shielding connected to ground throughout 360° at both ends for the motor cable. e. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal cases. the shielding must be connected to ground at both ends. . Merlin Gerin type XM200.5 mm2). ATV 31pppM2 and N4 drives feature built-in RFI filters. Installation diagram for ATV 31Hppp drives 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 5 6 7 8 9 3 8 9 4 7 6 Steel plate supplied with the drive. 7. Cable clamps must be made from stainless steel. connections. Shielded cable for connecting the motor. 8. Fix and ground the shielding of cables 6. the braking resistor cable and the control/command cables. Shielded cable for connecting the braking resistor.Use cable clamps of an appropriate size on the parts from which the shielding has been stripped. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in continuity. b ATV 31HU55N4 to ATV 31HD15N4.Schemes. For applications requiring several conductors.Strip the shielding. motor and cable shielding does not remove the need to connect the PE protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit. pull out a jumper to disconnect the filter. 7 and 8 as close as possible to the drive: . If using an additional input filter. There are two ways of isolating these filters from ground for operation on an IT system: b ATV 31H018M2 to ATV 31HU22M2 and ATV 31H037N4 to ATV 31HU40N4. as the screw on the heatsink is inaccessible. motor and cable shielding must have “high frequency” equipotentiality. mounting Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0 0 Altivar 31 Electromagnetic compatibility Schemes Additional radio interference suppression input filters VW3 A3140p 3-phase power supply Single phase power supply L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L'1 L'2 L'3 L'1 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L'2 VW3 A3140 VW3 A3140 ATV 31 ATV 31 Connections to meet the requirements of EMC standards Principle b Grounds between the drive. to attach them to the plate 1. Operation on an IT system IT system: isolated or impedance earthed neutral. Link 3 on the drive is then via the filter output cable. 55°C).45 % 50°C Mounting types A and B . I / In 100 % In -5% 90 % .35 % 60 % 50 % .40 % . ≥ 50 mm ≥d ≥d ≥ 50 mm ≥ 10 mm Types of mounting b Type A mounting ≥ 50 mm ≥ 50 mm b Type B mounting b Type C mounting ≥ 50 mm ≥ 50 mm Removing the protective cover Removing the protective cover from the top of the drive (as shown opposite) changes the degree of protection to IP 20. Derating curves for the nominal drive current (In) as a function of the temperature.25 % 70 % . Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Functions: pages 44 to 59 38 . at ± 10°.10 % .g.65 % 60°C Mounting types A and B 30 % 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz Switching frequency .20 % .30 % . switching frequency and type of mounting.55 % 60°C Mounting type C 40 % . Mounting recommendations for ATV 31H drives Install the unit vertically. b Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit.Mounting and installation recommendations Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0 0 Altivar 31 Depending on the conditions in which the drive is to be used.15 % 80 % . interpolate between 2 curves.35 % 50°C Mounting type C .25 % 40°C Mounting types A and B . b Do not place it close to heating elements.50 % .10 % For intermediate temperatures (e. its installation will require certain precautions and the use of appropriate accessories. b Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation.8 3. HU55S6X. ≥ 100 mm Mounting recommendations for ATV 31 drives Install the unit vertically. high humidity with risk of condensation and dripping water. b Use special filters with IP 54 protection. K = 0. install forced ventilation with a filter. H037M2. splashing liquid. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 100 mm Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Functions: pages 44 to 59 39 . For metal enclosures: K = 0. HU75N4. HU15M2. H055M3X. H055M2.3 0. HU22M3X. b Remove the protective cover from the top of the drive. at ± 10°. This enables the drive to be used in an enclosure where the maximum internal temperature can reach 50°C. Add the power dissipated by the other equipment components. H037N4. HU22S6X. Calculating the size of the enclosure Maximum thermal resistance Rth (°C/W) θ = maximum temperature inside enclosure in °C θ° – θ e θe = maximum external temperature in °C Rth = -----------------P P = total power dissipated in the enclosure in W Power dissipated by drive: see page 14. Do not place it close to heating elements. HU22N4.12 with internal fan.Mounting Variable speed drives and installation for asynchronous motors recommendations (continued) Altivar 31 0 0 Specific recommendations for mounting ATV 31 drives in a wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure Observe the mounting recommendations on the opposite page. HD15S6X HD15M3X 0. The openings and/or fans must provide a flow rate at least equal to that of the drive fans (see the table below). If there is not.6 Dust and damp proof metal wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (IP 54 degree of protection) The drive must be mounted in a dust and damp proof enclosure in certain environmental conditions: dust. etc. HU75S6X HU55M3X. H075M3X. HU11N4. corrosive gases. HU55N4. HU30N4. HD11N4. H055N4. HU15N6X H075M2. H037M3X. Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit. HU30M3X. H075S6X. HU11M2. HU15N4.55 1. To ensure proper air circulation in the drive: b Fit ventilation grilles. HD11S6X HU75M3X. HU15M3X. HU11M3X.15 without fan Note: Do not use insulated enclosures as they have a poor level of conductivity. HU40N4. H075N4. HU40N6X HU22M2.7 2. HD11M3X.55 1. Fan flow rate depending on the drive rating ATV 31 drive Flow rate m3/min H018M2. Useful heat dissipation surface of enclosure S (m2) (sides + top + front panel if wall-mounted) k S = --------Rth K = thermal resistance per m2 of enclosure. HU40M3X. HD15N4. H018M3X. or d.55 0.5 0. control circuit Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 – U6 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240 LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 24 and 660 V. please consult your Regional Sales Office.2 0.75 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31H075N4 0.37 0.5 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 D09 ATV 31HU75N4 7. prosp. The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits.5 10 15 20 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L07 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L22 NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA NS100HMA A 4 6.5 2. line Isc Contactor (3) Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (4) 521466 kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 D09 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D32 LC1 D32 LC1 D40 LC1 D40 Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 803714 3-phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 531250 GV2 L + LC1 K + ATV 31Hpppppp 3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V ATV 31H037N4 0.3 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU15N4 1.1 1. a.75 1.75 1.37 0. (3) Composition of contactors LC1-K06: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact LC1-D09/D32/D40: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact (4) Usual control circuit voltages.Combinations for self-assembly 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Motor starters 0 Applications The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor starter comprising a circuit-breaker.25 0. a contactor and an Altivar 31 variable speed drive.55 0.5 2 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU22N4 2. Motor starter for drive with heatsink Variable speed drive Reference Standard power Circuit-breaker (2) rating of 4-pole Reference Rating 50/60 Hz motors (1) kW ATV 31H018M2 ATV 31H037M2 ATV 31H055M2 ATV 31H075M2 ATV 31HU11M2 ATV 31HU15M2 ATV 31HU22M2 ATV 31H018M3X ATV 31H037M3X ATV 31H055M3X ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X ATV 31HU15M3X ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X 0.37 0.18 0. it therefore provides continuity of service and thermal protection of the motor.55 0.5 0.18 0. The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of the motor on stopping. and padlocking if required.5 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31H055N4 0.5 7.75 1 1.5 10 GV2 L32 32 22 LC1 D18 ATV 31HD11N4 11 15 NS80HMA 50 22 LC1 D32 ATV 31HD15N4 15 20 NS80HMA 50 22 LC1 D32 (1) The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code).c. (2) NS80HMA: product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand.5 2 3 0.5 2.5 7.75 1 1.2 3 4 5.3 10 10 14 18 25 2.5 2 3 – 5 7. LC1-D 40 . The Altivar 31 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits between phases and between phase and earth.5 11 15 HP 0.5 GV2 L10 6.25 0.3 10 10 14 18 25 25 50 50 80 100 Max.5 GV2 L07 2.1 1. control circuit.c.1 1. isolation.5 4 6.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU11N4 1.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU30N4 3 – GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU40N4 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU55N4 5. control circuit. it therefore provides continuity of service and thermal protection of the motor. LC1-D 41 . please consult your Regional Sales Office.c. prosp.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU40S6X 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU55S6X 5. and padlocking if required. The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of the motor on stopping.Combinations for self-assembly 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Motor starters 0 Applications The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor starter comprising a circuit-breaker.5 GV2 L20 18 22 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU75S6X 7. (2) NS80HMA: product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU15S6X 1. line Isc Contactor (3) Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (4) 521466 kA 3-phase supply voltage: 525…600 V ATV 31H075S6X 0. a contactor and an Altivar 31 variable speed drive.5 7. or d.5 10 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HD11S6X 11 15 GV2 L32 32 22 LC1 D09 ATV 31HD15S6X 15 20 NS80HMA 32 22 LC1 D09 (1) The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits. isolation. Motor starter for drive with heatsink Variable speed drive Reference Standard power Circuit-breaker (2) rating of 4-pole Reference Rating 50/60 Hz motors (1) kW HP A Max.5 2 GV2 L10 6. (3) Composition of contactors LC1-K06: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact LC1-D09/D32/D40: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact (4) Usual control circuit voltages. control circuit GV2 L + LC1 K + ATV 31Hpppppp Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 – U6 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240 LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 24 and 660 V. 803714 531250 a.c. The Altivar 31 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits between phases and between phase and earth.3 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU22S6X 2. 2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU30N4 3 3 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU40N4 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 (1) The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code).5 2 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU22N4 2.c.75 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31C075N4 0. it therefore provides continuity of service and thermal protection of the motor. control circuit Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 – U6 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240 LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 24 and 660 V. prosp. The Altivar 31 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits between phases and between phase and earth. or d.18 0.1 1. a contactor and an Altivar 31 variable speed drive.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU11N4 1.5 2.55 0. LC1-D 42 .5 0. Motor starter for customisable enclosed drive Variable speed drive Reference Standard power Circuit-breaker rating of 4-pole Reference Rating 50/60 Hz motors (1) kW ATV 31C018M2 ATV 31C037M2 ATV 31C055M2 ATV 31C075M2 ATV 31CU11M2 ATV 31CU15M2 ATV 31CU22M2 0. The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits.1 1.5 GV2 L07 2.2 HP 0. (2) Usual control circuit voltages. control circuit.37 0. isolation.75 1.c.3 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU15N4 1.75 1 1. The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of the motor on stopping.37 0. GV2 L + LC1 K + ATV 31Cppppp 531252 a.Combinations for self-assembly 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Motor starters 0 Applications The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor starter comprising a circuit-breaker.25 0. please consult your Regional Sales Office. and padlocking if required. line Isc Contactor Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (2) 521466 kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 D09 Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 803714 3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V ATV 31C037N4 0.5 GV2 L10 6.5 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31C055N4 0.55 0.5 2 3 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 A 4 6.3 10 10 14 18 25 Max. a.Combinations for self-assembly 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 Motor starters 0 Applications The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor starter comprising a circuit-breaker. control circuit.c.5 10 GV2 L32 32 22 LC1 D18 ATV 31KD11N4 11 15 NS80 HMA 50 22 LC1 D32 ATV 31KD15N4 15 20 NS80 HMA 50 22 LC1 D32 (1) The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of the motor on stopping. and padlocking if required.5 7.5 2 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU22N4 2.75 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31K075N4 0.5 GV2 L07 2.75 1. or d.25 0.37 0.5 2. prosp. Motor starter for drive kit Variable speed drive Reference Standard power Circuit-breaker rating of 4-pole Reference Rating 50/60 Hz motors (1) kW ATV 31K018M2 ATV 31K037M2 ATV 31K055M2 ATV 31K075M2 ATV 31KU11M2 ATV 31KU15M2 ATV 31KU22M2 0.c.75 1 1.5 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31K055N4 0.2 HP 0. (2) Usual control circuit voltages. The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits. control circuit Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 – U6 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240 LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 24 and 660 V.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU30N4 3 3 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU40N4 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU55N4 5.3 10 10 14 18 25 Max.55 0.1 1.5 0.5 2 3 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 A 4 6. it therefore provides continuity of service and thermal protection of the motor.3 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU15N4 1. please consult your Regional Sales Office.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU11N4 1.55 0. isolation.5 GV2 L10 6.5 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 D09 ATV 31KU75N4 7.37 0. a contactor and an Altivar 31 variable speed drive. line Isc Contactor Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (2) kA 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 D09 Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V ATV 31K037N4 0.1 1. LC1-D 43 . The Altivar 31 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits between phases and between phase and earth.18 0. noise reduction Skip frequencies Speed reference Analog inputs Preset speeds +/.speed Save reference Step by step (JOG) Control and reference channels Reference switching Summing inputs PI regulator Spooling Current limit switching Limiting low speed operating time Motor switching Control mode switching 2-wire control 3-wire control Forced local mode Freewheel stop Fast stop DC injection stop Brake control Management of limit switch Monitoring Fault management Fault reset General reset (resets all faults) Controlled stop on loss of line supply Stop mode in the event of a fault Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection Automatic restart Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage Fault relay. unlocking Operating time reset to zero Motor thermal protection Drive thermal protection R1. R2 relay configuration AOC/AOV analog outputs Saving and retrieving the configuration Function compatibility table page 45 page 45 page 46 page 46 page 46 page 46 page 46 page 47 page 47 page 48 page 48 page 48 page 48 page 49 page 49 page 49 page 49 page 50 page 50 page 51 page 51 page 51 page 51 page 52 page 52 page 53 page 53 page 53 page 53 page 54 page 54 page 54 page 54 page 54 page 54 page 55 page 55 page 55 page 56 page 56 page 56 page 56 page 56 page 57 page 57 page 57 page 57 page 57 page 58 page 58 page 58 page 59 page 59 page 59 563713 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 44 .Functions 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Summary of functions 563712 PowerSuite for PC welcome screen PowerSuite for Pocket PC identification screen Drive factory setting Functions of the display and keys Remote display terminal option Menu access levels Menu access code Operating speed range Acceleration and deceleration ramp times Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile Ramp switching Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp Voltage/frequency ratio Auto-tuning Switching frequency. for 0. LI4): LSP (low speed). 2-wire control v 4 preset speeds (LI3. 15 Hz.5 seconds b Constant torque operation.7 x nominal drive current. high speed (HSP): 50 Hz b Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp b Stop mode in the event of a fault: Freewheel b Motor thermal current = nominal drive current b Standstill injection braking current = 0. image of the motor frequency b Automatic adaptation of the deceleration ramp in the event of excessive braking b Switching frequency 4 kHz. 20 Hz b Analog inputs: v AI1 speed reference (0 +10 V) v AI2 (0 ± 10 V) summing of AI1 v AI3 (4-20 mA) not configured b Relay R1: fault relay b Relay R2: not assigned b Analog output AOC: 0-20 mA. 400 V (ATV 31HpppN4) or 600 V (ATV 31HpppS6X) b Linear ramp times: 3 seconds b Low speed (LSP): 0 Hz. LI2). with sensorless flux vector control b Logic inputs: v 2 directions of operation (LI1. ATV 31HpppM3XA and ATV 31HpppN4A drives only: Speed reference potentiometer “RUN”: Local control of motor operation STOP/RESET: Controls motor stopping locally and resets any faults Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 45 .Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Drive factory setting The drive is supplied ready for use in most applications. 10 Hz. with the following functions and settings: b Nominal motor frequency: 50 Hz b Motor voltage: 230 V (ATV 31HpppM2 and M3X). random frequency Functions of the display and keys 1 5 4 2 3 6 7 8 1 Information is displayed in the form of codes or values in four "7-segment" displays 2 Buttons for scrolling through the menus or modifying values 3 “ENT”: Validation button for entering a menu or confirming the new value selected 4 “ESC”: Button for exiting the menus (no confirmation) 5 2 diagnostic LEDs for the CANopen bus b 6 7 8 For ATV 31HppppM2A. Level 2: Access to advanced application functions. When access is locked using a code.1 and 999. from 0 to HSP. only the adjustment and monitoring parameters can be accessed. f (Hz) HSP LSP 0V x mA 4 mA Reference 10 V y mA 20 mA LSP: low speed. b Operating speed range Used to determine the 2 frequency limits which define the speed range permitted by the machine under actual operating conditions for all applications with or without overspeed.9 s..Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 ESC ENT stop reset FWO REV RUN b Remote display terminal option The remote display terminal can be mounted on the door of a wall-fixing or floorstanding enclosure. Significantly. Drive control keys v “FWD/RV”: reversal of the direction of rotation v “RUN”: motor run command v “STOP/RESET”: motor stop command or fault reset The speed reference is given by the remote display terminal. Level 3: Access to advanced application functions and management of mixed control modes. If the drive/operator terminal link is broken. from LSP to f max. f (Hz) 50 f (Hz) 50 563714 0 t1 t 0 t2 t Ramp adjustment with PowerSuite for PC Linear acceleration ramp Linear deceleration ramp t1: acceleration time t2: deceleration time t1 and t2 can be set independently between 0. Its subsequent action depends on the control and reference channel programming. Note: Protection via customer confidential code has priority over the switch. factory setting 0 HSP: high speed. factory setting: 3 s Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 46 . the drive locks in fault mode. factory setting 4 mA y: configurable between 4 and 20 mA. this level is interchangeable with the Altivar 28. 563220 Remote display terminal b Menu access levels There are 3 access levels: Level 1: Access to standard functions. b Menu access code Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code. factory setting 50 Hz x: configurable between 0 and 20 mA. factory setting 20 mA b Acceleration and deceleration ramp times Used to define acceleration and deceleration ramp times according to the application and the machine dynamics. Only the freewheel. It comprises an LCD display with programming and control keys and a switch for locking access to the menus. fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. .machines with fast steady state speed correction f(Hz) HSP dE2 AC2 ACC Forward 1 or Reverse 0 dEC t t 1 LI4 0 Acceleration 1 (ACC) and deceleration 1 (dEC): . transportation of people: the use of S ramps takes up mechanical play and eliminates jolts.tA1) (of ACC or AC2) tA3: can be set between 0 and 100% (of dEC or dE2) tA4: can be set between 0 and (100% .1 to 999. “S”.factory setting 3 s Acceleration 2 (AC2) and deceleration 2 (dE2): .adjustment 0.For pumping applications (installation with centrifugal pump and non-return valve): valve closing can be controlled more accurately if U ramps are used. . packaging. and limits “nonfollowing” of speed during rapid transient operation of high inertia machines. S ramps f (Hz) HSP f (Hz) HSP U ramps f (Hz) HSP f (Hz) HSP Customized ramps f (Hz) HSP f (Hz) HSP 0 t2 t1 HSP: high speed t1: ramp time set t2 = 0.material handling with smooth starting and approach .factory setting 5 s HSP: high speed t Example of switching using logic input LI4 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 47 .Selecting “linear”.9 s . “U” or customized profiles will affect both the acceleration and deceleration ramps. t 0 t2 t1 t 0 t2 t1 t 0 t2 t1 t 0 tA1 tA2 ACC or AC2 t 0 tA3 tA4 dEC or dE2 t HSP: high speed t1: ramp time set t2 = 0.1 to 999.Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 b Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile Used to gradually increase the output frequency starting from a speed reference. Ramp switching can be enabled by: v a logic input v a frequency threshold v a combination of logic input and frequency threshold Function suitable for: . . HSP: high speed tA1: can be set between 0 and 100% (of ACC or AC2) tA2: can be set between 0 and (100% .5 x t1 The curve coefficient is fixed.tA3) (of dEC or dE2) ACC: acceleration ramp 1 time AC2: acceleration ramp 2 time dEC: deceleration ramp 1 time dE2: deceleration ramp 2 time b Ramp switching Used to switch 2 acceleration or deceleration ramp times.6 x t1 The curve coefficient is fixed. which can be adjusted separately.For applications such as material handling.9 s .adjustment 0. following a linear ratio or a preset ratio. This function can be disabled if it causes instability.: resistive cage motor): ratio L v Variable torque applications (pumps. with (sensorless) flux vector control: ratio n v Energy saving. This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured. Function suitable for all applications not requiring precise stopping and not using braking resistors.the base frequency corresponding to the supply .Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 b Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp Used to automatically adapt the deceleration ramp if the initial setting is too low when the load inertia is taken into account.the nominal motor voltage (in V) given on the motor rating plate . b Switching frequency. The switching frequency can be adjusted during operation to reduce the noise generated by the motor. b Voltage/frequency ratio v Motor and power supply characteristics Used to determine the limit values for the voltage/frequency ratio according to the line supply. For all applications which require low motor noise. noise reduction The switching frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor. fans): ratio P v Machines with heavy loads operating at low speed.the maximum output frequency of the drive (in Hz) v Type of voltage/frequency ratio Used to adapt the voltage/frequency ratio to the application in order to optimize performance for the following applications: v Constant torque applications (machines with average loads operating at low speed) with motors connected in parallel or special motors (e. This function avoids the drive locking in the event of an excessive braking fault. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 48 .the nominal motor frequency (in Hz) given on the motor rating plate . for machines with slow speed and torque variations: ratio nLd Voltage is automatically reduced to a minimum according to the necessary torque U (V) Un 563715 Adjustment of the voltage/frequency ratio with PowerSuite for PC L n P f (Hz) frn Un: Nominal motor voltage frn: Nominal motor frequency b Auto-tuning Auto-tuning may be performed: v voluntarily by the operator using dialogue tools via local control mode or the serial link v each time the drive is switched on v on each run command v by enabling a logic input Auto-tuning is used to optimize application performance. Automatic adaptation must be cancelled if the machine has position control with stopping on a ramp and a braking resistor installed.g. The switching frequency is modulated randomly in order to avoid resonance. with a factory setting of 4 kHz. the motor and the application. Value: 2 to 16 kHz. High frequency switching of the intermediate DC voltage can be used to supply the motor with a current wave that has a lower harmonic distortion. machines with fast cycles. The following values should be set for variable or constant torque applications with or without overspeed: . which can be set within the operating range.0-10 V (AI1) . using the keypad or remote terminal keys v the remote display terminal reference v speed references provided by the communication bus or networks These different sources are managed by programming the reference functions and channels. depending on the level of analog inputs AI1. Factory settings: t Adjustment of preset speeds with PowerSuite for PC Forward 1 or Reverse LI2 0 t 1st speed: LSP (low speed or speed reference) 2nd speed: 10 Hz 3rd speed: 15 Hz 1 LI3 0 4th speed: 20 Hz (high speed) t 1 LI4 0 Example of operation with 4 preset speeds and 2 logic inputs t Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 49 . b Analog inputs There are 3 analog inputs: v 2 voltage inputs: . f (Hz) 563716 2 Hz Reference Motor speed change depending on the skip frequency reference Adjustment of the skip frequency with PowerSuite for Pocket PC b Speed reference The speed reference can have different sources depending on the drive configuration: v references provided by 3 analog inputs v the potentiometer reference (for ATV 31pppA drives only) v the +/.1 Hz from 0 Hz to 500 Hz. bulk product conveyors with unbalanced motor. Function suitable for material handling and machines with several operating speeds.± 10 V (AI2) v 1 current input: . 4.Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 b Skip frequencies Used to suppress one or two critical speeds which may be the cause of mechanical resonance. 8 or 16 preset speeds can be selected.speed function via logic input. fans and centrifugal pumps. 3 or 4 logic inputs. and Y is configurable between 4 and 20 mA. It is possible to prohibit the prolonged operation of the motor on 1 or 2 frequency bands (with a bandwidth of ± 1 Hz). f (Hz) 563717 20 15 10 LSP The speed obtained with inputs LI3 and LI4 at state 0 is LSP or the speed reference. b Preset speeds Used to switch preset speed references. AI2 and AI3.X-Y mA (AI3) where X is configurable between 0 and 20 mA. Function suitable for lightweight machines. Enabled by means of 1. 2. The preset speeds can be adjusted in increments of 0. 2. Two types of operation are available: v Use of single action buttons: Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction(s). Enables the reading and saving of the last speed reference prior to the loss of the run signal or mains supply. the input assigned to the ".speed" command decreases the speed. This function is suitable for centralised control of a machine with several sections operating in one direction or for control by a pendant control station of a handling crane with two operating directions.Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 b +/.speed) (speed maintained) – a – c 2nd press (+ speed) a and b c and d 0 t 0 Reverse operation 2nd press 1st press b b a a a a a a a t 0 LSP: low speed. The saved reference is applied at the next run signal.speed 0 Example of "+/. HSP: high speed Example with double action buttons and 1 logic input c d c t Note: This type of “+/.speed" with 2 logic inputs. f (Hz) 563718 Adjustment of the +/. single action buttons and reference saving t v Use of double action buttons (only one logic input assigned to “+ speed” is necessary): Logic inputs: Forward Reverse “+ speed” a b c d a and b: 1st press c and d: 2nd press f (Hz) HSP LSP LSP HSP Forward operation 2nd press 1st press Forward button Reverse button Released 1st press (. with or without the last reference being saved (motorised potentiometer function).speed” control.speed Used to increase or decrease a speed reference by means of 1 or 2 logic inputs.speed function with PowerSuite for PC HSP LSP Forward 1 or Reverse 0 1 t t + speed 0 1 t . Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 50 .speed” control is incompatible with 3-wire control b Save reference This function is associated with “+/. The input assigned to the "+ speed" command increases the speed. Enabled by a logic input and pulses given by the operating direction command. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 AI3 LIx Schemes: pages 36 to 39 51 . reference 2 is active if the logic input (or control word bit) is at 1.5 s. limited speed reference and minimum time between 2 pulses. etc. Note: The STOP keys on the keypad and the remote display terminal may retain priority.remote display terminal . Example: Reference 1 sent by AI1 Reference 2 sent by AI2 Reference 3 sent by AIP Drive speed reference: reference 1 + reference 2 + reference 3. Example: speed reference issued by CANopen and commands issued by the remote display terminal. reverse.CANopen control word The control and speed reference channels can be separate. This function is suitable for machines with product insertion in manual mode (example: gradual movement of the mechanism during maintenance operations). The “summing inputs” and “PI regulator” functions only apply to one reference channel. COM +10 AI1 AI2 t 1 LIx 0 t ±10 V + 24 V 0 Connection diagram for reference switching X-Y (X is adjustable from 0 to 20 mA and Y is adjustable from 4 to 20 mA) Example of reference switching b Summing inputs Used to add up 2 or 3 speed references from different sources. t 1 JOG 0 t tm: fixed time of 0.1 s). b Control and reference channels There are several control and reference channels which can be independent. The references to be added together are selected from all the possible types of speed reference.Modbus control word . The reference can be switched with the motor running.) and speed references can be sent using the following methods: v terminals (logic and analog inputs) v keypad for ATV 31pppA only (RUN/STOP and potentiometer) v ATV 31 keypad v via the serial link . minimum time between 2 pulses Speed reference: can be adjusted from 0 to 10 Hz factory setting 10 Hz Example of jog operation f (Hz) AI1 AI2 t Forward or 1 Reverse 0 b Reference switching Switching between 2 speed references can be enabled via: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word Reference 1 is active if the logic input (or control word bit) is at 0.Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 f (Hz) t tm Forward 1 or Reverse 0 b Step by step (JOG) Used for pulse operation with minimum ramp times (0. Commands (forward. to adjust the proportional and integral gain and to apply a ramp (time = ACC . adjustable from 0 to 100.analog input AI1.trL + qsL Base reference . the ramp type is forced to linear ramp. to correct inverse PI.trL Ramp 0.speed reference selected from all the possible types of speed reference v PI feedback: . The motor speed is limited to between LSP and HSP. require the use of 1 or 2 logic inputs respectively v Manual reference .1 s Start of function End of function qSH qSL trL t Motor speed When the function is configured. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 52 trH .logic input LI for switching operation to speed reference (Man) or PI regulation (Auto).regulation reference selected from all the possible types of regulation reference .internal regulator reference. During operation in automatic mode it is possible to adapt the process feedback. The PI reference can also be transmitted on line via the Modbus RS 485 serial link or via the CANopen bus. FBS Multiplier RPG RIG PI regulator X Ramp if PSP = 0 Ramp Auto Manual reference Auto/man Man HSP LSP ACC DEC Reference ACC: Acceleration DEC: Deceleration FBS: PI feedback multiplication coefficient HSP: High speed PIC: Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator LSP: Low speed RIG: PI regulator integral gain RPG: PI regulator proportional gain PI regulator b Spooling (Function only available with ATV 31ppppT drives) Function for winding reels of thread (in textile applications) Spooling drive Winding drive Reel of thread Gearbox Motor Thread Thread guide Gearbox Motor Cam Main shaft The cam speed of rotation must follow a precise profile to ensure steady winding. Note: The PI function is incompatible with the “preset speeds” and “step by step (JOG)” functions. This function is suitable for pumping and ventilation applications.DEC) for establishing the PI action on starting and stopping.preset PI references v 2 or 4 preset PI references.1 s Ramp dEC Base reference + trH Base reference + trH . adjustable from 0 to 100 . RUN command t LI or bit Wiring check trC t Ramp ACC Ramp 0.qSH Base reference Base reference . AI2 or AI3 v Auto/Man: . v PI reference: .Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Ramp PI Feedback + PIC X–1 PI inversion b PI regulator Used for simple control of a flow rate or a pressure with a sensor which supplies a feedback signal adapted to the drive. Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 b Current limit switching A 2nd current limit can be configured between 0. motor 2 v motor frequency loop gain v motor stability v motor slip compensation Motor thermal protection is disabled by this function.1 and 999. The following parameters are switched automatically: v nominal motor voltage v nominal motor frequency v nominal motor current v nominal motor speed v motor cosine Phi v selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2 v IR compensation. Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor. Switching between 2 current limits can be enabled via: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word b Limiting low speed operating time The motor is stopped automatically after an operating period at low speed (LSP) with zero reference and run command present. The function can be used to adapt the motor parameters. The motor restarts automatically on the ramp when the reference reappears or if the run command is broken and then re-established. This time can be set between 0. b Control mode switching Control channel switching provides a choice of 2 operating modes.5 times the nominal drive current.9 seconds (0 corresponds to an unlimited time). Switching must take place with the drive stopped and locked. Switching can be enabled by: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word 563719 Configuration of current switching with PowerSuite for PC Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 53 . this function enables a single drive to be used for vertical and horizontal movements. using an appropriate sequence at the drive output. Motor switching can be enabled by: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word With hoisting applications. b Motor switching Allows two motors with different powers to be supplied successively by the same drive. This function is suitable for automatic stopping/starting on pressure-regulated pumps. Factory setting 0 s.25 and 1. Altivar 31 control terminals LI1 LI2 24 V LI1: Stop LI2: Forward LIx: Reverse 0 1 Reverse 0 t LIx t Wiring diagram for 3-wire control Example of operation with 3-wire control b Forced local mode Forced local mode imposes control via the terminals or operator terminal and prohibits all other control modes. 3 operating modes are possible: v detection of the state of the logic inputs v detection of a change in state of the logic inputs v detection of the state of the logic inputs with forward operation always having priority over reverse Altivar 31 control terminals LI1: Forward LIx: Reverse 24 V LI1 LIx f (Hz) Wiring diagram for 2-wire control t 0 Stop 1 0 1 Forward t b 3-wire control Used to control the operating direction and stopping by means of pulsed contacts. Enabled by means of 1 or 2 logic inputs (one or two directions). or to maintain torque on stopping in the case of fans located in an airflow. A freewheel stop is achieved: v by configuring a normal stop command as a freewheel stop (on disappearance of a run command or appearance of a stop command) v by enabling a logic input b Fast stop Used to achieve a braked stop with an acceptable deceleration ramp time (divided by 2 to 10) for the drive/motor unit to avoid locking on an excessive braking fault. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 54 . Used for conveyors with emergency stop electrical braking. or AI3 and control via logic inputs v reference and control via RUN/STOP keys and potentiometer (ATV 31pppA drives only) v reference and control via the remote display terminal The changeover to forced local mode is enabled by a logic input. b Freewheel stop Stops the motor by resistive torque only if the motor power supply is cut. A fast stop is achieved: v by configuring a normal stop as a fast stop (on disappearance of a run command or appearance of a stop command) v by enabling a logic input Configuration of stop types with PowerSuite for Pocket PC 563720 b DC injection stop Used to brake (at low speed) high inertia fans.Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 b 2-wire control Used to control the direction of operation by means of a maintained contact. This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. or AI2. Enabled by means of 2 or 3 logic inputs (non-reversing or reversing). A DC injection stop is achieved: v by configuring a normal stop as a DC injection stop (on disappearance of a run command or appearance of a stop command) v by enabling a logic input The DC value and the standstill braking time are adjustable. The following references and commands are available for forced local mode: v references AI1. This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. .Horizontal lifting movement: Synchronizes brake release with the build-up torque on starting and brake engage at zero speed on stopping. 118%: motor overload threshold v drive thermal state: 100%: nominal thermal state. . in order to hold the load. The brake control sequence is managed by the drive. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage. and start smoothly as soon as the brake is released. 118%: drive overload threshold v motor torque: 100% = nominal torque v last fault v operating time v auto-tuning status v configuration and state of logic inputs v configuration of analog inputs 563721 Monitoring the different parameters with PowerSuite for PC 563722 Monitoring the different parameters with the oscilloscope function in PowerSuite for PC Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 55 . If. b Management of limit switch Used to manage the operation of one or two limit switches (with 1 or 2 operating directions). the torque is insufficient. Ensure that the settings and configurations selected cannot cause a drop or a loss of control of the lifted load. Each limit (forward. v Principle: . freewheel or fast. . reverse) is associated with a logic input.Acceleration time: For lifting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0.Vertical lifting movement: Maintain motor torque in an upward direction when the brake is being released and engaged. increase the brake release current (the maximum value is imposed by the drive). a braking resistor should be used. . Values that can be adjusted for releasing the brake: current threshold and time delay Values that can be adjusted for engaging the brake: frequency threshold and time delay Enabled: by relay logic output R2 or logic output AOC assigned to brake control. Function suitable for material handling applications with movements equipped with electromagnetic brakes (hoisting) and machines requiring a parking brake (unbalanced machines). the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only.Brake release current: Adjust the brake release current to the nominal current indicated on the motor. .Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Speed reference 0 Relay or logic output 1 0 Motor current T Brake release current t1 t t 0 t2 t Speed reference Brake engage frequency 0 LI forward or reverse 1 0 State of brake Engaged Released t t Engaged Accessible settings: t1: Brake release time delay t2: Brake engage time delay Brake control b Brake control Used to manage control of an electromagnetic brake in synchronization with the starting and stopping of the motor to avoid jolts and load veering.Brake engage frequency: Set to twice the nominal slip then adjust according to the result.Brake engage time delay t2: Adjust according to the type of brake. during testing. in order to prevent jerking. Ensure that the drive does not change to current limiting.Brake release time delay t1: Adjust according to the type of brake. Recommended settings for brake control for a vertical lifting application (for a horizontal lifting application set the current threshold to zero): . It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release. b Monitoring The following data can be displayed: v frequency reference v internal PI reference v frequency reference (absolute value) v output frequency applied to the motor (value signed in two’s complement) v output value in customer units v current in the motor v motor power: 100% = nominal power v line voltage v motor thermal state: 100%: nominal thermal state.5 seconds. The same recommendation applies for deceleration. Note: For a lifting movement. The type of stop that occurs on detection of a limit can be configured as normal. Following a stop. drive overheating. Function suitable for applications where a restart can be vital (conveyor in a furnace. Function suitable for material handling. continuous product processing machines. All faults are reset on a change of state of the logic input. The function is enabled by a logic input. Resets the following faults: overvoltage. serial link fault. freewheel or fast for the following faults: v external fault (detection enabled by a logic input or a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word) v motor phase loss fault If a downstream contactor is being used between the drive and the motor. machines with high inertia. the motor phase loss fault should be inhibited. Type of stop possible: v locking of the drive and freewheel stop v stop which uses the mechanical inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as possible v stop on ramp v fast stop (depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive) b Stop mode in the event of a fault The type of stop that occurs on detection of a fault can be configured as normal. for example on moving parts in material handling systems. machine with hardening products which need to be removed). external fault. smoke extraction station. DC bus overvoltage. 563723 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 56 . overspeed. The restart conditions after a reset to zero are the same as those of a normal power-up. load veering. motor phase loss.Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Fault management with PowerSuite for PC b Fault management There are different modes of operation on a resettable fault: v Freewheel stop v The drive switches to the fallback speed v The drive maintains the speed at which it was operating when the fault occurred until the fault disappears v Stop on ramp v Fast stop The detected resettable faults are as follows: v drive overheating v motor overheating v CANopen bus fault v Modbus serial link failure v external faults v loss of 4-20 mA signal b Fault reset Used to clear the last fault by means of a logic input. b General reset (resets all faults) This function can be used to inhibit all faults. b Controlled stop on loss of line supply Used to control motor stopping on a loss of line supply. Function suitable for applications where the drives are difficult to access. including thermal protection (forced operation) and may cause irreparable damage to the drive. loss of 4-20 mA reference. "Line supply undervoltage" and "line supply phase loss" faults are reset automatically when the line supply is restored. Fault monitoring is active if the logic input is at state 1. motor overload if the thermal state is less than 100%. 5 s. even if it is not configured. b Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage The line voltage monitoring threshold is lowered to 50% of the motor voltage. It contains a “C/O” common point contact. For these types of fault. if it has been configured b Operating time reset to zero The drive operating time can be reset to zero. The whole restart procedure can last anywhere from 5 minutes to an unlimited time. If the drive has not restarted after the configured time. b Fault relay. b Automatic restart Enables the drive to be restarted automatically after locking following a fault if this fault has disappeared and if the other operating conditions permit a restart. provided the run command is still present: v loss of line supply or simple switch off v fault reset or automatic restart v freewheel stop On disappearance of the event. the effective speed of the motor is detected in order to restart on a ramp at this speed and return to the reference speed. unlocking The fault relay is energised when the drive is powered up and is not faulty. fans and pumps driven by residual flow. a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be guaranteed. For this fault. The faults permitting this restart are: v line supply overvoltage v motor thermal overload v drive thermal overload v DC bus overvoltage v failure of a line supply phase v external fault v loss of 4-20 mA reference v CANopen bus fault v Modbus serial link fault v line supply voltage too low. and where a restart will not endanger equipment or personnel in any way. it will lock and the procedure is abandoned until it has been switched off and on again. etc. This restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer wait periods of 1 s. This function is suitable for machines where the speed loss is negligible during the time over which the mains supply is lost (machines with high inertia). then switching the power back on v by assigning a logic input to the “reset faults” function v by the “automatic restart” function. 10 s then 1 minute for the rest. the relay configured as a fault relay remains activated if the function is configured. The drive can be unlocked after a fault in one of the following ways: v by powering down until the “ON” LED extinguishes. The speed reference and the direction of operation must be maintained for this function.Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection (“catch on the fly”) Used to restart the motor smoothly after one of the following events. the function is always active. In this case. 563724 Configuration of the fault relay with PowerSuite for Pocket PC Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 57 . This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured. The speed detection time can be up to 1 s depending on the initial deviation. This function is suitable for machines or installations in continuous operation or without monitoring. 1 1.6 Motor current/ItH Motor thermal protection curves b Drive thermal protection Thermal protection. 10 000 2 h 45) t 13 5 10 20 50 Hz ( Trip time in seconds ( 1 000 16 mn) 100 0.6 1. Locks the drive in the event of a fault.8 0.3 1.5 times the nominal drive current.8 1.9 Motor current/Drive In b R1/R2 relay configuration The following states are signalled when the relay is powered on: v drive fault v drive running v frequency threshold reached v high speed reached v current threshold reached v frequency reference reached v motor thermal threshold reached v brake sequence (R2 only) Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 58 .7 1.7 0.5 1.9 1 1.4 1.2 1.4 1.2 1. Thermal protection can be adjusted from 0.3 1.Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 b Motor thermal protection Indirect motor thermal protection is implemented via continuous calculation of its theoretical temperature rise. This function is suitable for applications with self-cooled motors. by a PTC probe fitted on the heatsink or integrated in the power module. t 5000 3000 Trip time in seconds 1000 200 160 100 60 2 0 1 1. ensures that the drive is protected in the event of poor ventilation or excessive ambient temperatures.5 1.1 1.2 to 1. speed Management of limit switch Preset speeds X A PI regulator Jog operation X X Brake sequence DC injection stop A A X Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time) The arrow indicates which function has priority X Fast stop Freewheel stop X Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable A Example: the "Freewheel stop" function has priority over the "Fast stop" function Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 59 . Stop functions have priority over run commands.by the incompatibility of certain functions with one another Functions Summing inputs Summing inputs +/. AOC: can be set as 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA AOV: can be set at 0-10 V b Saving and retrieving the configuration A configuration can be saved to the EEPROM.speed ManagePreset ment of speeds limit switch PI regulator Jog operation Brake sequence DC injection stop Fast stop Freewheel stop A A +/. Retrieving this configuration clears the current configuration. This function is used to store a configuration in addition to the current configuration. 563725 Function compatibility table b Configurable I/O Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible.by the number of drive I/O . The selection of functions is limited: . The following assignments are possible: v motor current v motor frequency v motor torque v power supplied by the drive v drive fault v frequency threshold reached v high speed reached v current threshold reached v frequency reference reached v motor thermal threshold reached v brake sequence The adjustment of analog output AOC/AOV is used to modify the characteristics of the current analog output AOC or the voltage analog output AOV.Functions (continued) 0 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Altivar 31 0 Configuration of AOC/AOV outputs with PowerSuite for PC b AOC/AOV analog output The same data is available on analog outputs AOC and AOV. b Schneider Beijing 60 .schneider-electric. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.schneider-electric. Norwest Business Park Baulkham Hill _ NSW 2153 Birostrasse 11 1239 Wien Schneider Electric Russian Fed. : +375 172 23 75 50 Fax : +375 172 23 97 61 Tel. 6001-31 Tel. Schneider Electric India Schneider Electric Chile Schneider Electric Croatia Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.: +61 298 51 28 00 Fax: +61 296 29 83 40 Tel. Union Village PO Box 3901 .m.com. Pdte Ed. 202 220004 Minsk Dieweg 3 B .Juma Building Abu Horaira Avenue PO Box 355 . Brunei (Darussalam) Bulgaria Burkina Faso Burundi Cambodia Cameroon Canada Cape Verde Caribee Cayman islands Central African Republic Chad Chile China Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Cameroon b Schneider Canada Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Chile S.com. of.: +97 322 7897 Fax: +97 321 8313 www.schneiderelectric.co.au Tel.b. Waterman Avenue M4 B1Y2 Toronto . Schneider Electric Brazil Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.Douala 19.: +3592 919 42 Fax: +3592 962 44 39 www. Frei Montalva.ca Tel.CEP 04795-907 São Paulo-SP Schneider Electric Singapore Expo 2000.Nassau Floor 1 .bg Tel. Prospect Macherova 5.com.H.schneider-electric.com.1678 Caseros (provincia Buenos Aires) Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Contacts are assured by www.: +431 610 540 Fax: +431 610 54 54 www.: +237 343 38 84 Fax: +237 343 11 94 Tel.Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 28-07-2003 Afghanistan Albania Algeria Andorra Angola Anguilla Antartica Antigua & Barbuda Argentina Armenia Aruba Australia Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India Schneider Electric Austria voie A Lot C22 Zone industrielle Rouiba .304 Manama Schneider Electric India Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.Ontario Schneider Electric Senegal Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.schneider-electric.: +3223737711 Fax: +3223753858 www.: +56 2 444 3000 Conchali .Santiago Fax: +56 2 423 9335 Landmark bldg-Room 1801 8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd Chaoyang District 100004 Beijing Tel.br Tel.cl www.cn Tel.schneider.: +86 10 65 90 69 07 Fax: +86 10 65 90 00 13 www.Alger Schneider Electric France Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Viamonte 2850 .com Tel. Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Cameroon Avda.schneider-electric.squared.schneider-electric. Avenida Das Nações Unidas 23223 Jurubatuba .: +54 1 716 88 88 Fax: +54 1 716 88 33 www.ar Tel. rue de l'Hôtel de Ville BP12087 . : +1 242 327 42 91 Fax : +1 242 327 42 91 Tel. Boulevard Vaptzarov 1407 Sofiav Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric Kenya Schneider Electric Viet Nam 166.: +55 55 24 52 33 Fax: +55 55 22 51 34 www. : +213 21 92 97 02 à 09 Fax : +213 21 92 97 00 à 01 b Schneider Electric Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Argentina Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Limited b Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. 2 Solent Circuit Austria Azerbaijan Bahamas Bahrain b Schneider Austria Ges.: +1 416 752 8020 Fax: +1 416 752 4203 www. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.be Tel.A.at b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric Bangladesh Barbados Belarus Belgium Belize Benin Bermuda Bhutan Bolivia Bosnia and Herzegovina Botswana Bouvet island Brazil Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Industries SA b Schneider Electric nv/sa Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Brazil Ltda.1180 Brussels Schneider Electric USA Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.schneider-electric. Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 28-07-2003 Christmas island Cocos (Keeling) islands Colombia Comoros Congo Cook islands Costa Rica Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia Calle 45A #102-48 Bogota DC Schneider Electric la Reunion Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Australia 1.: +506 232-60-55 Fax: +506 232-04-26 www.5 kmts oeste de la Embajada Americana.fi www.: +1 809 334 66 63 Fax: +1 809 334 66 68 Tel.schneiderelectric.: +385 1 367 100 Fax: +385 1 367 111 Tel. rue Nadar 92500 Rueil Malmaison Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.schneider-electric.schneider-electric.gr Tel.Cairo Schneider Electric USA Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Egypt Ehitajate tee 110 EE 12618 Talinn Schneider Electric Egypt Schneider Electric Brazil Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia Sinimäentie 14 02630 Espoo 5.cz Czech Republic Democratic Rep.10000 Zagreb Bureau de Liaison de La Havane Calle 36. Ens.: +420 2 810 88 111 Fax: +420 2 24 81 08 49 www.schneider-ca.A. San José.Santo Domingo Tel.14564 Kifissia Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. 11371 .r.Accra Schneider Electric Spain 14th km .com Tel.: +20 24 01 01 19 Fax: +20 24 01 66 87 www. Paraiso .o.N°306-Apto1 Entre 3ra y 5ta Avenida Miramar Playa Habana 28 General Timayia Avenue Kyriakos Building.eg b Lexel Electric Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Oy b Schneider Electric SA Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric GmbH b Schneider Electric Ghana Gilbraltar Greece Greenland Grenada Guadeloupe Guam Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric AE Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by 61 .fr Tel.: +53 724 15 59 Fax: +53 724 12 17 Cyprus b Schneider Electric Cyprus Tel. : +593 2 224 42 42 Edificio Mansion Blanca-Quito Fax : +593 2 224 42 94 68. Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Senegal Schneider Electric Russian Fed.186 00 Schneider Electric Cameroon Baltorpbakken 14 DK-2750 Ballerup Schneider Electric Egypt Calle Jacinto Manon Esq. Pavas. Apartado: 4123-1000 San Jose Fallerovo Setaliste 22 HR . of Congo Denmark Djibouti Dominican Republic b Schneider Electric CZ. Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric A/S Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Ecuador Egypt El Salvador Equatorial Guinea Eritrea Estonia Ethiopia Falkland islands Faroe islands Fiji Finland France French Polynesia French West Indies Gabon Gambia Georgia Germany Ghana b Schneider Electric Ecuador SA b Schneider Electric Egypt sae Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Av. Croatia Cuba b Schneider Electric SA b Schneider Electric Tel. El Tayaran Street Nasr City.schneider. Schneider Electric Martinique Schneider Electric Australia Tel.: +57 1 426 97 00 Fax: +57 1 426 97 40 b Schneider Electric de Colombia S.de Tel.: +33 (0)1 41 29 82 00 Fax: +33 (0)1 47 51 80 20 www.Republica del Salvador 1082 y Nac Tel.schneider-electric.: +45 44 73 78 88 Fax: +45 44 68 5255 www.dk Tel.schneider-electric. : +358 9 527 000 Fax : +358 9 5270 0376 Tel. : +233 21 70 11 687 Fax : +233 21 77 96 22 www. Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Centroamérica Ltda.com. Costa Rica C. s.RN Athens-Lamia GR . Federico Geraldino Edificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 402.: +49210 240 40 Fax: +492 10 240 49 256 Tel. : +372 650 97 00 Fax : +372 650 97 22 Tel. Gothaer Straße 29 D-40880 Ratingen PMB Kia 3rd Floor Opeibea House Airport Commercial Center Liberation road .schneider-electric.A. Block #A301 Larnaca 6046 Thámova 13 Praha 8 .: +00357 248 12646 Fax: +00357 246 37382 Tel.: +302 106 29 52 00 Fax: +302 106 29 52 10 www.com. 7 20041 Agrate Brianza (Mi) Rue Pierre et Marie Curie 18 BP 2027 Abidjan 18 Shop#5.824. Youngdeungpo-ku 150-037 Seoul Schneider Electric Russian Fed.kr/schneider/ Kurdistan Kuwait Kyrgyz Republic Laos Latvia Lebanon Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Kuwait Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Tel. Wanchai Fehérvári út 108 – 112 H-1116 Budapest Schneider Electric Denmark Max House.: +225 21 75 00 10 Fax: +225 21 75 00 30 Tel.: +62 +21 750 44 06 Fax: +62 +21 750 44 15/ 16 Tel. : +1876 755 41 27 Tel.id Tel.it www. : +82 2 2630 9700 Fax : +82 2 2630 9800 www. Plaza Dunrobin 30 Dunrobin Avenue . 31th Floor.schneiderelectric.Deglava str. 30 Harbour Road.: 962 65 16 78 87 Fax: 962 65 16 79 1 Tel. Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric India b P.schneider-electric.: +852 25 65 06 21 Fax: +852 28 11 10 29 Tel.111-0054 Tokyo Abu Al Haj Commercial Complex 2nd Floor .Kingstown Torigoe F. Box 15875-3547 15116 Teheran 38050 Grenoble Cedex 9 Maynooth Road Cellbridge . Al Gaas Tower . Kildare Centro Direzionale Colleoni Palazzo Sirio . LT-2012 Vilnius Schneider Electric Australia 1.: +33 04 76 60 54 27 Fax: +33 04 76 60 56 60 Tel.. Honduras Hong Kong Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Sénégal Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.A.Beyrouth Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Ghana Schneider Electric Tunisia Schneider Electric Switzerland 44.fr 62 .824. Cheil Bldg. Torigoe Taito-Ku . 1 Dr Jha Marg.: +39 39 655 8111 Fax: +39 39 605 6237 Tel.Amman Tel. 8 P.157 www. : +254 2. Box 166223 . : +370 278 59 59/61 Fax : +370 278 59 60 b Schneider Electric Industrie SAS Agence de Metz Tel.co. : +961 1 20 31 19 Lesotho Liberia Libya Liechtenstein Lithuania Loro Sae Luxembourg Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Lexel Electric Contacts are assured by Tel.hu b Schneider Electric (Hong Kong) Ltd Hungary Iceland India Indonesia b Schneider Electric Hungária Villamossági Rt.co. Okhla 110 020 New Dehli Ventura Building 7th Floor Jalan R.26 Cilandak .: +98 218 71 01 42 Fax: +98 218 71 81 87 Tel. Avenue Charles Malek Immeuble Ashada.: +81 358 35 35 81 Fax: +81 358 35 35 85 Tel. Jordan Jordan University Street Kazakstan Kenya b Schneider Electric Kazakhstan Liaison Office Prospekt Abaia 157 off 9 480009 Almaty Power Technics Complex Monbasa Road . Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric United States Room 3108-28.BP n° 35190 57075 Metz cedex 3 .PO Box 46345 Nairobi Schneider Electric Australia 3Floor. Kartini Kav.schneiderelectric.schneider-electric.schneiderelectric-in. LV1035 Riga Tabaris. : +7 327 250 63 70 Tel.156 Fax : +254 2.Viale Colleoni.France b Schneider East Africa Kiribati Korea Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Korea Ltd Tel.T.csinfo.: +353+0 1 6012200 Fax: +353+0 1 6012201 Tel. : +7 327 250 93 88 Tel. : +371 780 23 74/75 Fax : +371 754 62 80 Tel.co.com www. : +91 11 631 71 61 Tel. Rue Graham Bell . : +931 87 74 Tel.Sharq 2nd Floor PO Box 20092 . 7-Ka Youngdeungpodong. 94-46.A.: +36 1 382 26-06 Fax: +36 1 206 1429 www.Office # 202 .Co. : +91 11 631 85 84 Tel.O.: +965 240 75 46 Fax: +965 240 75 06 b Lexel Electric b Schneider Electric Liban Tel. Schneider Indonesia Iran (Islamic Republic of) b Telemecanique Iran Irak Ireland Italy b Schneider Electric Industries SA b Schneider Electric Ireland b Schneider Electric S.schneider-electric. Ivory Coast Jamaica Japan b Schneider Electric Afrique de l'Ouest b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric Japan Ltd Jordan b Schneider Electric Industr.: 33 03 87 39 06 03 Fax: 33 03 87 74 25 96 www. : +961 1 20 46 20 Tel. Schneider Electric Thailand 60A A.13 061 Safat Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Verkiu str.O. Sun Hung Kai Centre.jp www.ie www.Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 28-07-2003 Guatemala Guinea-Bissau Guinea Guyana Haiti Heard & Mac Donald isl. Bldg 1-8-2.12430 Jakarta 1047 Avenue VALI ASSR P.p.schneider-electric. 113 Muscat 43-L.11 Jalan U1/19.F.M.com. rue Ibnou Khalikane Quartier Palmiers 20100 Casablanca Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Singapore Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric India Waarderweg 40 . D. Box 15355 .O.no b Schneider Electric Norge A/S b Schneider Electric CA b Schneider Electric Pakistan Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by 63 .: +525 686 30 00 Fax: +525 686 24 09 www.Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 28-07-2003 Macau Macedonia Madagascar Malawi Malaysia Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Bhd Schneider Electric China Schneider Electric Bulgaria Schneider Electric la Reunion Schneider Electric South Africa Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan Schneider Electric Reunion Schneider Electric Senegal Schneider Electric Tunisia Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Immeuble Cottrell .Lagos Tel. M.C.co.schneider-electric.Lahore Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Uruguay Tel.P.nl Tel.Plot 634 Niue Norfolk island North Korea Northern Mariana islands Norway Oman Pakistan Palau Panama Papua New Guinea Paraguay Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric China Schneider Electric Australia Solgaard Skog 2 Postboks 128 . : +64 9 829 04 90 Fax : +64 9 829 04 91 www. Alam Road.schneiderelectric.: +47 6924 9700 Fax: +47 6925 7871 Tel.: +212 299 08 48 to 57 Fax: +212 299 08 67 and 69 www. 26. Gulberg II .: +92 42 5754471 à 73 Fax: +92 42 5754474 www. : (603) 7883 6333 Fax : (603) 7883 6188 www.schneiderelectric. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.schneider-electric.Postbus 836 2003 RV Haarlem Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.schneider. Guadalupe del Moral México. 09300 Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Romania Schneider Electric France Schneider Electric Russian Fed.ZI de la Lézarde 97232 Le Lamentin Schneider Electric Senegal Route côtière Calodyne .schneider-electric. : +234 1 2702973 Fax : +234 1 2702976 Tel.nz Tel.ma Tel.com.: 230 282 18 83 Fax: 230 282 18 84 Tel. Rojo Gomez N° 1121-A Col.Mauritius Schneider Electric Reunion Calz. 2nd floor.New Lynn Auckland Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Abeyemo Alakija Street Victoria Islan .co.: +05 96 51 06 00 Fax: +05 96 51 11 26 Tel.mx Tel.1501 Moss c/o Arab Development Co PO Box 439 . Schneider Electric Australia 14 Charann Place Avondale P.8th Floor . Seksyen U1 Maldives Mali Malta Marshall islands Martinique Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Mauritania Mauritius Mayotte Mexico Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Contacts are assured by b Groupe Schneider Mexico Micronesia Moldova Monaco Mongolia Montserrat Morocco Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Morocco Mozambique Myanmar Namibia Nauru Nepal Netherlands Netherlands Antilles New Caledonia New Zealand Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric BV Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric (NZ) Ltd Nicaragua Niger Nigeria Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Nigeria Limited Biro plaza .: +968 77 163 64 Fax: +968 77 104 49 Tel.: +31 23 512 4124 Fax: +31 23 512 4100 www. .my b Schneider Electric (Malaysia) Sdn No. b Schneider Electric Industries SA www.ch 64 .sg Slovak Republic Slovenia Solomon islands Somalia South Africa b Schneider Electric Slovakia spol s.schneiderelectric. 190. Ate Lima 03 391 Sen.co.: +7095 797 40 00 Fax: +7095 797 40 03 www. Pl.o. : +94 77 48 54 89 www. : +02 45 52 40 10 and 40 30 Fax : +02 45 52 40 00 Tel. rue des 2 canons BP 646 .and Co . Box 4484 Doha Immeuble Futura.97497 Sainte Clothilde Bd Ficusului n°42 Apimondia. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Tel.schneider-electric. Vulcano. Box 89249 .: +34 93 484 3100 Fax: +34 93 484 3308 Tel.: +966 1 265 1515 Fax: +966 1 265 1860 Tel.za Spain Sri Lanka b Schneider Electric España. S.pe b Schneider Electric Philippines.O. Inc 5th Floor.P. Corp.: +221 820 68 05 Fax: +221 820 58 50 b Schneider Electric Singapore Pte 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65 Tel.com.11682 Riyadh BP 15952 .pl www.o.schneider-electric.Warszawa Tel. ALCO Building Pitcairn Poland Portugal Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia 03-878 . ul. Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric South Africa (PTY) Ltd Tel.: +65 484 78 77 Fax: +65 484 78 00 Tel.sk www. Letamendi. Swaziland Sweden Switzerland Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric AB b Schneider Electric (Switzerland) S. 5-7 08007 Barcelona Liaison office SRI Lanka Level 3B Valiant towers 46/7 Nawam Mawatha-Colombo 2 Schneider Electric Italy Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.3063 Ittigen Puerto Rico Qatar Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Qatar Branch Tel.Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 28-07-2003 Peru Philippines b Schneider Electric Peru S.do Forte.: +262 28 14 28 Fax: +262 28 39 37 Tel. Lubinowa 4a b Schneider Electric Portugal Av.com St Helena St Kitts & Nevis St Lucia St Pierre et Miquelon St Vincent & Grenadines Sudan Suriname Svalbard & Jan Mayen isl.schneider-electric.es www. Los Telares n°231 Urb.schneider-electric.: +97 4424358 Fax: +97 4424358 Tel.A.schneider-electric.1.pt b Schneider Electric Polska Sp. Dr.O.schneiderelectric-in.o. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. d. 3 Edificio Suécia II.o.ro Reunion b Schneider Electric Romania b Schneider Electric Russian Federation Rwanda Samoa San Marino Sandwich & Georgia island Sao Tome & Principe Saudi Arabia Senegal Seychelles Sierra Leone Singapore b Schneider Electric ZAO Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by www. Piso 3-A CP 2028 Carnaxide 2795 Linda-A-Velha Schneider Electric United States c/o Khalifa BinFahred Al Thani Trad. : +386 1 23 63 555 Fax : +386 1 23 63 559 www.: +351 21 416 5800 Fax: +351 21 416 5857 www.: +41 31 917 3333 Fax: +41 31 917 3355 www.: +27 11 254 6400 Fax: +27 11 315 8830 Tel.ru b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric Sénégal Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Ltd Tel.schneider-electric.: +48 22 511 8 200 Fax: +48 22 511 8 210 Tel. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.: +401 203 06 50 Fax: +401 232 15 98 Tel.si b Schneider Electric. : +632 896 6063 Fax : +632 896 7229 www.schneider-electric.r.A.A.se www.schneider-electric. et.Dakar-Fann Rond point N'Gor .Midrand. www.schneiderelectric.schneider-electric. Schneider Electric Egypt Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Denmark Schneider Electric South Africa Djupdalsvägen 17/19 19129 Sollentuna Schermenwaldstrasse 11 CH .com.zo.schneider-electric. Sector 1 Bucuresti Enisseyskaya 37 129 281 Moscow Schneider Electric Kenya Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Italy Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Senegal Second Industrial City P.A.: +511 348 44 11 Fax: +511 348 05 23 Tel.: +46 8 623 84 00 Fax: +46 8 623 84 85 Tel.Dakar Schneider Electric Reunion Schneider Electric Ghana #02-17/20 TechPoint Singapore 569059 Borekova 10 SK-821 06 Bratislava Dunasjka 47 1000 Ljubljana Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Egypt Private Bag X139 Halfway House 1685 . Gil Puyat Avenue Makati 1209 Tel. off. Tütüncü Mehmet Efendi Cad.S.326/327 74 000 Achgabad Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.schneider-electric. of Thailand b Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd 2FI.O. Ji-Hu Road. Ratarski put 27d 11186 Belgrade Zambia Office c/o Matipi Craft Center Building Plot 1036 . N°37.schneider-electric.: +263 4 707 179/180 Fax: +263 4 707 176 65 .Malki Gheibeh and Qassas bldg.Tunis Tel. 2nd Floor.com. Beaulieu Avenue Trincity Trinidad West Indies Rue du Lac Oubeira 1053 Les Berges du Lac .o.squared.75319 Caracas Unit 2.schneider. : +886 2 8751 6388 Fax : +886 2 8751 6389 Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Italy Calle 162/ Piso 2 Edificio Centro Cynamid La Urbina.: +44 (0)1 628 508 500 Fax: +44 (0)1 628 508 508 Tel.9.Kitwe Zimbabwe Liaison Office 75A Second Street (corner Livingstone Avenue) Harare Tel.: +90 21 63 86 95 70 Kat 1-2 .Schneider Electric worldwide 0 Up-dated: 28-07-2003 Syrian Arab Republic b Schneider Electric Syria Elba Street .S. of Schneider Electric Industries S.tr b Schneider Electric Turkmenistan Liaison Office Turks & Caicos islands Tuvalu Uganda Ukraine United Arab Emirates Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric Abu Dhabi www. N°:110 Tel. : +59 82 707 2392 Fax : +59 82 707 2184 www. United Rep.IL 60067 Ramon Masini 3190 Montevideo Schneider Electric Russian Fed.: +1 847 397 2600 Fax: +1 847 925 7500 Tel. S.schneider-electric.: +662 204 9888 Fax: +662 204 9816 b Schneider (Thailand) Ltd www. Nei-Hu Dist.E.A.: 1868 640 42 04 Fax: 1868 640 42 04 Tel.co.com.Ho Chi Minh City Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. b Schneider Zambia Zimbabwe b Schneider Electric Tel. Schneider Electric Kenya 20th Floor Richmond Building 75 Sukhumvit 26 Road. 1st Street West Ext.ua United Kingdom b Schneider Electric Ltd Tel. 1070 .com.uk United States b Schneider Electric www.: +84 8 8103 103 Fax: +84 8 8120 477 Tel.A. e-Town Building 364 Cong Hoa Street Tan Binh District .A www. in Viet Nam Virgin islands Wallis & Futuna islands Western Sahara Yemen Yugoslavia Zambia Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Jugoslavija d.Accra Road PO Box 22792 .ve Viet Nam b R. Tel. : +963 11 37 49 88 00 Fax : +963 11 37 17 55 9 www..81080 Göztepe – Istanbul Fax: +90 21 63 86 38 75 rue Neitralny Turkmenistan 28. 1st floor PO Box 33876-Damascus Taipei 114 Tel.schneider-electric.R.: +381 11 192 414 Fax: +381 11 107 125 Tel.co. Klongtoey Bangkok 10110 Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia 6.tw Taiwan.Maidenhead Berkshire SL6 1 DN North American Division 1415 Roselle Road Palatine .com. : +993 12 46 29 52 Fax : +993 12 46 29 52 www.: +380 44 462 04 25 Fax: +380 44 462 04 24 Tel.o. Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Mg SD TE..: +260 222 22 52 Fax: +260 222 83 89 Tel. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Morocco Schneider Electric U.com Uruguay Uzbekistan Vanuatu Vatican city St.A.: +9712 6 339444 Fax: +9712 6 316606 Tel.: +216 71 960 477 Fax: +216 71 960 342 Tel.th Togo Tokelau Tonga Trinidad & Tobago Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by b Schneider Electric Tunisia Turkey Turkmenistan b Schneider Electric Tunisia b Schneider Elektrik Sanayi Ve Ticaret A. Republic of China Tajikistan Tanzania.: +58 2 241 13 44 Fax: +58 2 243 60 09 Tel.schneiderelectric./Holy See Venezuela b Schneider Electric Uruguay S. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Kenya Rue Krechtchalik 2 252601 Kiev PO Box 29580 Office Floor 2/Lulu Street Al Marina Plaza Tower Abu Dhabi Braywick House East Windsor Road . . Production : Schneider Electric Industries Photos : Schneider Electric Industries Printed by : October 2003 http://www.92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex Owing to changes in standards and equipment.schneider-electric.com ART. 063912 DIA2ED2031002EN . bd Franklin Roosevelt F .Schneider Electric Industries SAS Headquarters 89. the characteristics given in the text and images in this document are not binding until they have been confirmed with us. Altivar 31H Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Installation manual . 1 . wait for 10 minutes before working on the equipment. This is the time required for the capacitors to discharge. After the ALTIVAR has been switched off and the display has disappeared completely. the power components and some of the control components are connected to the line supply.. In such applications. can also cause shutdowns.Contents Drive references ______________________________________________________________________________________________ 2 Mounting ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4 Wiring ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 8 NOTE: Please also refer to the Programming Manual. The drive cover must be kept closed. It is the responsibility of the end user to ensure that the machine meets these standards. in particular by using a low speed detector to cut off power to the drive if the motor performs an unprogrammed shutdown. Finally. there is a risk of restarting which may endanger certain machines or installations. the drive power supply must be disconnected before any operation on either the electrical or mechanical parts of the installation or machine. The drive must not be used as a safety device for machines posing a potential risk of material damage or personal injury (lifting equipment. The motor can be stopped during operation by inhibiting start commands or the speed reference while the drive remains powered up. The motor itself may be stopped by a mechanical blockage. In general. The products and equipment described in this document may be changed or modified at any time. The drive must be installed and set up in accordance with both international and national standards. especially those which must conform to safety regulations. Their description can in no way be considered contractual. The specifications contained in this document must be applied in order to comply with the essential requirements of the EMC directive. If personnel safety requires prevention of sudden restarts. The Altivar 31 must be considered as a component: it is neither a machine nor a device ready for use in accordance with European directives (machinery directive and electromagnetic compatibility directive). Bringing the device into conformity is the responsibility of the systems integrator who must observe the EMC directive among others within the European Union. overspeed checks and checks to ensure that the trajectory remains under constant control must be made by separate devices which are independent of the drive. in the event of a fault. It is extremely dangerous to touch them. In this case the user must take precautions against the possibility of restarts. can shut down the drive and consequently the motor. The drive is fitted with safety devices which. either from a technical point of view or in the way they are operated. If the cause of the shutdown disappears. voltage variations. for example). this electronic locking system is not sufficient: fit a cut-off on the power circuit. When the drive is powered up. especially line supply failures. 4 3. line current (2) at at 200 V 240 V A A 2.9 13. inrush Nominal current In transient current (1) current (1) (3) (4) A 10 10 10 10 19 19 19 A 1.8 13.5/2 2.8 2.5 Power dissipated at nominal load W 23 38 43 55 71 86 114 146 180 292 388 477 628 ATV31H018M3X ATV31H037M3X ATV31H055M3X ATV31H075M3X ATV31HU11M3X ATV31HU15M3X ATV31HU22M3X ATV31HU30M3X ATV31HU40M3X ATV31HU55M3X ATV31HU75M3X ATV31HD11M3X ATV31HD15M3X (1) These power ratings and currents are for a maximum ambient temperature of 50°C and a switching frequency of 4 kHz in continuous operation.4 6.37/0.3 1.0 A 2.0 A 2.6 24.5 27. ambient temperature and mounting conditions.3 3.2 3. Above 4 kHz. 2 . add an A at the end of the reference.g.18/0.9 Drive (output) Max.5 1. the drive will reduce the switching frequency in the event of excessive temperature rise.0 99. e.75/1 1.75 0.25 0.4 12.5 7.0 5.5 20.6 8. For a drive with control potentiometer and RUN/STOP buttons.1 71.9 3.3 5.2/3 3/3 4/5 5.0 Altivar 31 Reference (5) Max. (3) Peak current on power-up.4 12.3 4.0 54. Derating curves are shown on page 6 as a function of switching frequency.1/1.6 8.8 6.55/0.1/1.18/0.7 4.2 10.5 33.4 1.5 3.2 (6) 6. prospective line Isc" indicated.2 4.8 40.2 22.3 4.9 7.5 3. (6) 4.0 1.0 66.0 16.9 18.0 11. Apparent prospective power line Isc kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 kVA 0.1 9.0 2.0 19.8 8. (5) Reference for a drive with built-in terminal but no control unit.75/1 1.5 1.5 7. line current (2) at at 200 V 240 V A A 3.6 7.1 1.37/0. Apparent prospective power line Isc kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 kVA 0.25 0.4 11.2 10. inrush Nominal current In transient current (1) current (1) (3) (4) A 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 19 19 23 23 93 93 A 1.6 14.5/2 2.The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz. (4) For 60 seconds.3 49. Nonetheless.7 4. Max.0 5.8 5.3 3.0 28.4 12.5 0.7 1.6 26.75 0.8 3.4 Power dissipated at nominal load W 24 41 46 60 74 90 123 ATV31H018M2 ATV31H037M2 ATV31H055M2 ATV31H075M2 ATV31HU11M2 ATV31HU15M2 ATV31HU22M2 3-phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz 3-phase motor 200…240 V Motor Power indicated on plate (1) kW/HP 0.3 5.1 16.3 21.: ATV31H018M2A.7 17. for the max.2/3 Line supply (input) Max.5 12.6 82.Drive references Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz 3-phase motor 200…240 V Motor Power indicated on plate (1) kW/HP 0.5 Altivar 31 Reference (5) Max.1 10.1 36.0 11.2 A at 230 V and 240 V.5 55.9 8.0 13.8/4.8 A at 200 V/4. (2) Current on a line supply with the "Max.9 4.5 5. The temperature rise is controlled by a PTC probe in the power module.5 81. the nominal drive current should be derated if operation above 4 kHz needs to be continuous. Max. voltage (240 V + 10%).5/10 11/15 15/20 Line supply (input) Max.5/7.7 2.8 5.55/0.9 8.8 32.0 16.8 16.6 7.3 41.2 21.5 0.0 46.4 Drive (output) Max.2 15.6 A at 208 V/4.6 1.0 3.2 6.2 6.4 5.9 63. 5 1.0 25.5 6.5 33.8 9.75 0.2 36.8 4.37/0. Nonetheless.5 24.7 6.1/1.5 4.5/2 2.5 7.3 3.9 7.6 49.3 17.6 2.7 16.8 Drive (output) Max.0 4.8 6.5/7.7 15.55/0.0 37.3 27.2 15.75/1 1.2/3 3/3 4/5 5.0 Power dissipated at nominal load W 36 48 62 94 133 165 257 335 ATV31H075S6X ATV31HU15S6X ATV31HU22S6X ATV31HU40S6X ATV31HU55S6X ATV31HU75S6X ATV31HD11S6X ATV31HD15S6X (1) These power ratings and currents are for a maximum ambient temperature of 50°C and a switching frequency of 4 kHz in continuous operation.8 2.5 25.2 8.4 A 2.5 41.2 4.0 33.1 5.8 36.5 7.5 14.5 1. (2) Current on a line supply with the "Max. voltage (500 V + 10%.3 21.5/10 11/15 15/20 Line supply (input) Max.2 3.1 18.1 5.5/2 2.75/1 1.9 9.2 5. 3 .0 27.5/7.5 25.3 13.9 8.5 7.2 28.7 3.8 Drive (output) Max.9 2. The temperature rise is controlled by a PTC probe in the power module.9 6.0 25. Apparent prospective power line Isc kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 kVA 1.7 4.9 6.5 16.5 4.8 2. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz.7 2.6 21.0 22.2 13.Drive references 3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V 50/60 Hz 3-phase motor 380…500 V Motor Power indicated on plate (1) kW/HP 0.4 4.0 Altivar 31 Reference Max.5 1. for the max. Derating curves are shown on page 6 as a function of switching frequency.0 17.0 11.1 9.3 14.8 8. line current (2) at at 380 V 500 V A A 2. Above 4 kHz.4 3.7 10. inrush Nominal current In transient current (1) current (1) (3) (4) A 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 30 30 97 97 A 1. Max. ambient temperature and mounting conditions.2 5.0 Power dissipated at nominal load W 32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 232 269 397 492 ATV31H037N4 ATV31H055N4 ATV31H075N4 ATV31HU11N4 ATV31HU15N4 ATV31HU22N4 ATV31HU30N4 ATV31HU40N4 ATV31HU55N4 ATV31HU75N4 ATV31HD11N4 ATV31HD15N4 3-phase supply voltage: 525…600 V 50/60 Hz 3-phase motor 525…600 V Motor Power indicated on plate (1) Line supply (input) Max.6 9. Apparent prospective power line Isc kW/HP 0. add an A at the end of the reference.5 27. the nominal drive current should be derated if operation above 4 kHz needs to be continuous. (5) Reference for a drive with built-in terminal but no control unit.4 5.7 33.9 3.g.1 9. the drive will reduce the switching frequency in the event of excessive temperature rise.5 0. prospective line Isc" indicated.7 2.4 10.9 16. e.4 31. For a drive with control potentiometer and RUN/STOP buttons.0 19.9 3.0 32. 600 V + 10%).4 4. (4) For 60 seconds.0 18. (3) Peak current on power-up.4 48.7 14.7 21.6 4.2 21.3 2.1 9. inrush Nominal current In transient current (1) current (1) (3) (4) A 12 12 12 12 36 36 117 117 A 1.0 A 2.2/3 4/5 5. Max.5/10 11/15 15/20 kA 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 kVA 2.9 10.3 10.2 1.5 Altivar 31 Reference (5) Max.: ATV31H037N4A.0 A 2. line current (2) at at 525 V 600 V A 2. H075S6X. HU40M3X. HU40N4. HU75M3X.5±1 Ø mm 2x5 2x5 2x5 2x5 2x5 2x5 For screw M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 Weight kg 0.05 1. HU11N4.25 1.0 (1) For drives in the A range.05 1. HU22N4. HU22S6X.5±1 121. H075M2 HU11M3X.5 H mm 157±1 Ø mm 4x5 For screw M4 Weight kg 2. HD15N4. HU15S6X Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 b a mm 72 72 72 72 105 105 b mm 145 145 145 145 143 143 c (1) mm 120 130 130 140 130 150 G mm 60±1 60±1 60±1 60±1 93±1 93±1 hr mm 5 5 5 5 5 5 H mm 121. H075N4. HU30M3X. HU55S6X. HU75N4. H037M3X H055M3X. H075M3X H018M2. HU22M3X. add 8 mm for the protruding potentiometer button. HU30N4. HD11N4.5±1 121. HU15M3X HU11M2. HD15M3X.5±1 121.Mounting Dimensions and weights h = H = G a 2Ø c ATV31 H018M3X. H037N4.5±1 121.5±1 121.35 b c = G a = ATV31 HU22M2. HD15S6X Size 7 a mm 140 b mm 184 H h 4Ø c (1) mm 150 G mm 126±1 hr mm 6. HD11S6X. HU40S6X HU55M3X. HU15M2. HU55N4.35 Size 8 180 232 170 160±1 5 210±1 4x5 M4 4.9 1. 4 . H055N4. HU75S6X HD11M3X.HU15N4. H037M2 H055M2.9 0.70 Size 9 245 330 190 225±1 7 295±1 4x6 M5 9. we recommend that the protective cover on the top of the drive be removed. protective cover removed (the degree of protection becomes IP20) Type C mounting: Free space u 50 mm on each side. with protective cover fitted u 50 mm u 50 mm Type B mounting: Drives mounted side-by-side. When IP20 protection is adequate. protective cover removed (the degree of protection becomes IP20) u 50 mm u 50 mm 5 .Mounting Mounting and temperature conditions Install the unit vertically. ≥ 50 mm ≥ 50 mm Removing the protective cover Example ATV31HU11M3X 3 types of mounting are possible: Type A mounting: Free space u 50 mm on each side. at ± 10°. as shown below. Free space in front of unit: 10 mm minimum. Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit. Do not place it close to heating elements. switching frequency and type of mounting. If you are installing the drives in enclosures. HU11N4 H075S6X.35 % . HU75N4 HD11S6X HU75M3X. ATV31 H018M2.10 % . HU15M3X HU15N4.15 % . H037M2. HU40N4 HU55S6X. HU15M2 H075M3X. I/In In = 100 % -5% 90 % 80 % . make provision for a flow of air at least equal to the value given in the table below for each drive. HU75S6X HU55M3X HU55N4. 55°C). H055N4. HD11M3X.65 % 30 % .20 % 40°C mounting types A. H055M2. H055M3X. HU11M2. H018M3X. HU11M3X.25 % 70 % . HU22M3X. interpolate between 2 curves. HD11N4. H037N4.50 % . HU15S6X H075M2.Mounting Derating curves for the drive current In as a function of the temperature.55 % 50°C mounting types A and B 60°C mounting type C 60°C mounting types A and B Switching frequency 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz For intermediate temperatures (e.25 % 50°C mounting type C .g. HU40S6X HU22M2.30 % . HD15N4 HD15S6X HD15M3X Flow rate in m3/hour 18 33 93 102 168 216 6 .35 % 60 % 50 % 40 % . HU40M3X HU30N4.40 % .10 % . HU22N4 HU22S6X.45 % . HU30M3X. B and C . H075N4. H037M3X. HU30N4. HU75S6X HD11M3X. H037M2 H055M2. H075M2 HU11M3X. HU22N4. HD11S6X. HU55S6X. H075M3X H018M2. H075N4. HU15M2. HU11N4. HD15M3X. HD15N4. HD15S6X Size 7 Size 8 Size 9 7 . HU75N4.4 Size 5 -6 Size 7 Size 8 Size 9 2 50 49 2 2 48 2 75 2 Screws supplied: 4 x M4 screws for fixing the EMC clamps (clamps not supplied) 1 x M5 screw for ground 75 ATV31 H018M3X. HU30M3X. HU40M3X. HU15S6X Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 ATV31 HU22M2. HU22M3X. H055N4. HU15M3X HU11M2. HU75M3X. H037M3X H055M3X. HU22S6X. as shown in the drawings below. H037N4. HU15N4. H075S6X.Mounting Electromagnetic compatibility EMC mounting plate: Supplied with the drive Fix the EMC equipotentiality mounting plate to the holes in the ATV 31 heatsink using the 2 screws supplied. HU40S6X HU55M3X. Size 1 . HU55N4. HD11N4. HU40N4. H037M2. H037N4.2 H018M2. H037M3X.2 25 4 Power terminal functions Terminal t R/L1 S/L2 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 PO PA/+ PB PC/U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 Function Ground terminal Power supply For Altivar ATV 31 All ratings ATV31ppppM2 ATV31ppppM3X ATV31ppppN4 ATV31ppppS6X All ratings All ratings All ratings All ratings All ratings DC bus + polarity Output to braking resistor (+ polarity) Output to braking resistor DC bus . H055M3X.5 5 Tightening torque in Nm 0. AWG 6 HU55N4. HU40M3X. Power terminal characteristics Altivar ATV 31 Maximum connection capacity AWG mm2 AWG 14 2. HU11M3X. HD15N4. H075M2. H055M2. HU22N4. Example ATV31HU11M2 Power terminals Connect the power terminals before connecting the control terminals. HU15M2. HU11N4. HU30M3X. open the cover as shown in the example below.Wiring Access to terminals To access the terminals. AWG 3 HD11N4. HU22S6X. HU15M3X HU11M2. HU22M2. H018M3X. H075N4. HU55S6X.HU15N4. HU15S6X. HD11S6X.polarity Outputs to the motor Never remove the commoning link between PO and PA/+. HU40S6X HU55M3X. 8 . HU75M3X. HD15M3X. AWG 10 HU22M3X. HD15S6X 16 2. H075M3X.8 1. HU75N4. HU30N4. H055N4. HU75S6X HD11M3X. HU40N4 H075S6X. HU15S6X. HD15S6X R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/. HU15M3X. HU30N4.U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 P0 PA/+ PB PC/. HU40M3X. HU11N4. HU75M3X. H055M2. HU55S6X. HD15M3X. H075M3X ATV 31H018M2. HD15N4. HU75S6X R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/. HU15N4. HU40N4.U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 ATV 31HD11M3X. HU15M2. H075M2 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/. H037M3X. HU22M3X. HU30M3X. HD11N4.Wiring Arrangement of the power terminals ATV 31H018M3X. HU22S6X.U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 P0 PA/+ PB PC/. H055M3X. H055N4.U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 9 . HU22N4. H037M2. HU75N4. HU40S6X ATV 31HU11M2. H037N4.U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 ATV 31HU11M3X. H075S6X. HD11S6X. HU22M2 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/. HU55N4. H075N4.U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 ATV 31HU55M3X. AWG 14 . tightening torque: 0.Max.5 mm2 .Maximum connection capacity: 2.6 Nm 10 LI3 .Wiring Control terminals COM AOC AOV R1C LI5 Logic input configuration switch Source CLI SINK COM 10V AI1 AI2 CLI LI4 LI6 R2C R1A R1B R2A AI3 Control terminals 24V LI1 LI2 RJ45 connector RJ45 . 5 kΩ • State 0 if < 5 V. 10-bit + sign converter • Precision ± 4. safe voltage ± 30 V) The + or .4 and L/R = 7 ms): 1. min. switching capacity on inductive load (cos ϕ = 0.Y mA. of max. X and Y can be programmed from 0 to 20 mA • Impedance 250 Ω • Resolution 0. customer current available 100 mA Programmable logic inputs • + 24 V power supply (max. switching power 1. • Impedance 30 kΩ • Resolution 0. 30 V Max. Analog input X . + 24 V protected against short-circuits and overloads. X and Y can be programmed from 0 to 20 mA.02 mA.01 V.000.2%.0). of max.and CLI) • Sampling time 4 ms See page 12.2 kΩ. protected against short-circuits and overloads COM AI1 10 V AI2 Power supply for setpoint potentiometer 1 to 10 kΩ Analog voltage input Bipolar analog input 0 ± 10 V (max.3%. +10 V (+ 8% .and CLI) • Sampling time 4 ms Programmable logic inputs • + 24 V power supply (max.polarity of the voltage on AI2 affects the direction of the setpoint and therefore the direction of operation. AI3 Analog current input COM AOV AOC Analog I/O common Analog voltage output AOV or Analog current output AOC or Logic voltage output AOC AOV or AOC can be assigned (either. min. (1) Characteristics of digital/analog converter. value • Sampling time 8 ms • Operation with shielded cable 100 m max.Wiring Control terminals Arrangement. switching capacity: 10 mA for 5 V c • Max.5 A for 250 V a and 30 V c • Sampling time 8 ms • Service life: 100. load impedance 800 Ω • Resolution 8 bits (1) • Precision ± 1% (1) • Linearity ± 0. switching capacity on resistive load (cos ϕ = 1 and L/R = 0 ms): 5 A for 250 V a and 30 V c N/O contact of programmable relay R2 • Max. 10-bit converter • Precision ± 4.Y mA. switching power Analog I/O common Analog voltage input 0V Analog input 0 + 10 V (max. load impedance 470 Ω or Analog output X .2%.2% (1) • Sampling time 8 ms This analog output can be configured as a 24 V logic output on AOC. value • Sampling time 8 ms • Operation with shielded cable 100 m max. linearity ± 0. max.5 kΩ • State 0 if < 5 V. 10 mA max. load impedance 1. characteristics and functions of the control terminals Terminal R1A R1B R1C R2A R2C Function Common point C/O contact (R1C) of programmable relay R1 Electrical characteristics • Min.2%. state 1 if > 11 V (voltage difference between LI. but not both) 24 V LI1 LI2 LI3 Logic input power supply Logic inputs LI4 LI5 LI6 Logic inputs CLI Logic input common 11 . of max. 30 V) • Impedance 3.3%.000 operations at max. state 1 if > 11 V (voltage difference between LI. linearity ± 0. 30 V) • Impedance 3. 10-bit converter • Precision ± 4.3%. linearity ± 0. safe voltage 30 V) • Impedance 30 kΩ • Resolution 0.01 V.000 operations at min. max. 19 V. value • Sampling time 8 ms 0V Analog output 0 to 10 V. min. Y mA (1) Line choke.Wiring Wiring diagram for factory settings ATV31ppppM2 Single-phase supply (1) R / L1 S / L2 ATV31ppppM3X/N4/S6X 3-phase supply (1) (2) Using the analog output as a logic output U / T1 R / L1 W / T3 T / L3 R1A S / L2 LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 R1C R2C CLI LI6 R1B PA / + V / T2 R2A PC / - COM 24V COM AOC AOV A0C 24 V relay or 24 V PLC input or LED +10 AI1 AI3 0 ± 10 V W1 U1 V1 PB M 3= Reference potentiometer Braking resistor. Logic input switch This switch assigns the logic input common link to 0V. if used (single phase or 3-phase) (2) Fault relay contacts. if used X . Choice of associated components: Please refer to the catalogue. contactors. solenoid valves. Note: Fit interference suppressors to all inductive circuits near the drive or coupled to the same circuit (relays. 24 V or "floating": 0V SOURCE CLI at 0 V (factory setting) CLI LI1 LIx CLI CLI "floating" CLI 24V LI1 LIx CLI at 24 V SINK CLI LI1 LIx 12 AI2 P0 . for remote indication of the drive status. etc). for example RCDs with reinforced immunity from the s. provide one "residual current device" per drive. Keep the power cables separate from circuits in the installation with low-level signals (detectors. PLCs. 13 . For control and speed reference circuits. The time delay is not possible for 30 mA devices. When upstream protection by means of a "residual current device" is required by the installation standards. video. If you are using cables > 50 m between the drive and the motor. connecting the shielding to ground at each end. If the installation includes several drives. Choose a suitable model incorporating: • HF current filtering • A time delay which prevents tripping caused by the load from stray capacitance on power-up. add output filters (please refer to the catalogue). telephone). Control Keep the control circuits away from the power cables. In this case. measuring apparatus. a type A device should be used for single-phase drives and type B for 3-phase drives.i range (Merlin Gerin brand).5 mA). choose devices with immunity against accidental tripping.Wiring Examples of recommended circuit diagrams Using volt-free contacts • Switch in "Source" position (ATV31 factory setting for types other than ATV31ppppA) 0V • Switch in "SINK" position (factory setting for ATV31ppppA) 24V LI1 24V LI1 COM Using PLC transistor outputs • Switch in CLI position • Switch in CLI position COM CLI LI1 COM CLI LI1 24V 0V PLC 0V PLC 24V Wiring recommendations Power The drive must be earthed to conform with the regulations concerning high leakage currents (over 3. we recommend using shielded twisted cables with a pitch of between 25 and 50 mm. These filters can be isolated from ground for operation on an IT system as follows: ATV31H018M2 to U22M2 and ATV31H037N4 to U40N4: Pull out the jumper on the left of the ground terminal as illustrated below.Wiring Operation on an IT system IT system: Isolated or impedance earthed neutral. Use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-linear loads (a Merlin Gerin type XM200. ATV 31pppM2 and N4 drives feature built-in RFI filters. for example). Normal (filter connected) IT system (filter disconnected) ATV31HU55N4 to D15N4: Move the cable tag on the top left of the power terminals as illustrated below (example ATV31HU55N4): IT system (filter disconnected) Normal (filter connected) (factory setting) 14 . Wiring Electromagnetic compatibility Principle • Grounds between the drive. 15 . use cables with a small cross-section (0. HD15M3X HD11N4. HU15N4 H075S6X. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. 130 pF (picoFarads) per metre. H075N4. HU30N4. . The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. H018M2. HD15N4 HD11S6X. Link 3 on the drive is then via the filter output cable. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in continuity. • Use shielded cables with shielding connected to ground throughout 360° at both ends for the motor cable 6. For applications requiring several conductors.Use stainless steel cable clamps of an appropriate size on the parts from which the shielding has been stripped. HD15S6X 1 Sheet steel grounded plate supplied with the drive.18 to 1.Strip the shielding. 8 Shielded cable for connecting braking resistor (if fitted). 6 Shielded cable for motor connection with shielding connected to ground at both ends. HU11M3X. HU75S6X Size 9 HD11M3X. HU11M2. use cables with low linear capacitance: max. 7 Shielded cable for connecting the control/signalling wiring. Note: • If using an additional input filter. braking resistor (if used) 8. motor and cable shielding does not remove the need to connect the PE protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit. For 0. 7 and 8 as close as possible to the drive: . 2 Altivar 31 3 Non-shielded power supply wires or cable 4 Non-shielded wires for relay contacts 5 Fix and ground the shielding of cables 6. to be fitted as indicated on the diagram. HU75N4 HU55S6X. HU15S6X Size 7 HU22M2 HU30M3X. H055M2. it should be mounted under the drive and connected directly to the line supply via an unshielded cable. The shielding must be connected to ground at both ends. • The HF equipotential ground connection between the drive. HU15M2 H037M3X H075M3X H037M2 H075M2 HU15M3X HU22M3X H037N4. HU40M3X HU22N4. HU11N4.5 mm2). HU40S6X Size 8 HU55M3X. • Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable. and control-signalling cables 7. The shielding must be clamped tightly enough to the metal plate to ensure correct contact. to attach them to the plate 1. motor and cable shielding must have "high frequency" equipotentiality. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. HU40N4 HU22S6X. HU75M3X HU55N4. H055N4.5 kW drives. Installation diagram (examples) Sizes 1 to 7 Size 8 Size 9 2 2 2 3 1 8 6 3 5 4 1 8 6 7 4 3 1 5 5 7 8 6 4 7 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 ATV31 H018M3X. if the switching frequency is higher than 12 kHz. H055M3X. VVDED303041EN atv31h_installing manual_EN_V2 2004-02 . Altivar 31 Communication variables User's manual #### #### #### . The products described in this document may be changed or modified at any time. either from a technical point of view or in the way they are operated.Contents General _____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 3 Communication bus monitoring __________________________________________________________________________________ 5 Supervision and control in LINE mode _____________________________________________________________________________ 6 Function compatibility _________________________________________________________________________________________ 10 DRIVECOM variables _________________________________________________________________________________________ 11 Control variables_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 14 Monitoring variables __________________________________________________________________________________________ 16 Identification variables ________________________________________________________________________________________ 22 Configuration and adjustment variables ___________________________________________________________________________ 23 Replacing an ATV28 with an ATV31 _____________________________________________________________________________ 51 Code index _________________________________________________________________________________________________ 52 While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document. Their description can in no way be considered contractual. Schneider Electric SA assumes no liability for any omissions or errors it may contain. NOTE 2 . nor for any damages resulting from the application or use of the information herein. factory settings.General The Altivar 31 can be connected directly to Modbus and CANopen buses by means of an RJ45 connector. consult the on-line help provided. which supports both protocols. Failure to observe this precaution may result in malfunctions. The "Communication variables" User's Manual defines the drive control processes and the drive variables which can be accessed by these buses. drive stopped or running • R/WS: read access when drive stopped or running and write access only when drive stopped • R/W: read and write access when drive stopped or running Authorized addresses Only the addresses and values defined in this document can be used. Any other address or value must be considered to be reserved and must never be written. The communication variables are listed with: • Their address •••• in decimal format for Modbus • Their index and subindex address ••••/•• in hexadecimal format for CANopen They are grouped into several different tables according to the following criteria: • DRIVECOM variables • control variables • monitoring variables • identification variables • configuration and adjustment variables Read/write Whether the parameters have read and/or write access is indicated in the "Read/Write" column with the following codes: • R: read only. 3 . If the PowerSuite software workshop is used. adjustment. etc). The communication function provides access to the drive’s configuration. It supplements each of the following manuals: • Modbus • CANopen These documents should be referred to for the hardware and software setup specific to each bus. control and monitoring functions. We also recommend consulting the Programming Manual for additional explanations (operation. Perform the transitions required to return the drive to "run" status .Control modes Control and reference channels The control and the reference may originate from different channels: the terminal block the built-in keypad (ATV31.A only) the remote display terminal Modbus CANopen These channels are managed: .or in deterministic mode The "Function access level (LAC)" and "Mixed mode (CHCF)" parameters are used to select the run mode. stop requests which can be activated by the terminals or by the remote display terminal always have priority: Type of stop Fast stop DC injection stop Freewheel stop From LI2 to LI6 LI2 to LI6 LI2 to LI6 Drivecom state reached "Operation enabled" "Operation enabled" "Switch on disabled" Actions for restoring control of the Altivar using the fieldbus .either in priority mode for compatibility with the ATV28 ..Perform the transitions required to return the drive to "run" status LI1 "Switch on disabled" 3-wire control stop via STOP logic input (LI1) (3-wire control) Stop by the display terminal STOP key "Switch on disabled" (1) (1)Unless the PSt parameter has been set to "NO" 4 .Set the logic input assigned to the "fast stop" function to 1 (active at 0) . Operation is described in detail in the Programming Manual ("Control menu" section).Perform the transitions required to return the drive to "run" status .Set the logic input assigned to the "injection stop" function to 0 (active at 1) .Release the Stop key .Set the logic input assigned to STOP to 1 (active at 0) ..Set the logic input assigned to the "freewheel stop" function to 1 (active at 0) . Priority stops In line mode. 5 . inhibiting the communication fault should be restricted to the debug phase or to special applications. Bit 14 (NTO) of "Extended control word (CMI)" is also used to inhibit Modbus communication monitoring. In its factory setting. For safety reasons. This configuration is not saved if the power supply is disconnected.Communication bus monitoring The drive behaviour in the event of loss of communication can be configured via the "SLL" parameter (page 47) for Modbus or the "COL" parameter (page 47) for CANopen. This configuration is saved if the power supply is disconnected. loss of communication triggers a fault (COF for CANopen or SLF for Modbus) with freewheel stopping. rdY..Supervision and control in LINE mode DRIVECOM status chart Enter the status chart Key DRIVECOM drive status Drive status applied to ATV ETA = 16#xxxx "ATV terminal display" Transition condition X CMD = 16#xxxx All states 0 Not ready to switch on ATV powered down ETA = 16#xx00 Fault disappeared.. ACC or DEC Examples (default configuration): CMD = 16#000F : Forward operation CMD = 16#080F : Reverse operation CMD = 16#100F : Stop (configured by "Stt") CMD = 16#200F : DC injection stop CMD = 16#400F : Fast stop Any "Operation enabled" output except "Quick stop" = freewheel stop 6 ." Quick stop active Emergency stop ETA = 16#xx07 "rdY. ACC or DEC ETA = 16#8227 : Reverse operation. speed reached ETA = 16#8627 : Reverse operation. speed reached ETA = 16#0227 : Forward operation. fault reset CMD =16#0080 13 Fault Malfunction reaction active ETA = 16#xxxx 1 Switch on disabled ATV locked Disable voltage CMD = 16#0000 or modification of 9 a configuration parameter (motor stopped) or STOP key on display terminal or STOP at terminals ETA = 16#xx40 "nSt" 14 Malfunction ATV faulty ETA = 16#xxx8 15 8 Shutdown CMD =16#0006 Disable voltage CMD = 16#0000 Disable or voltage modification of Shutdown CMD = 16#0000 a configuration CMD = 16#0006 2 7 or 12 parameter Quick stop (motor stopped) CMD = 16#0002 or STOP key on Disable display terminal voltage Ready to switch on 10CMD = 16#0000 or ATV waiting STOP at terminals or ETA = 16#xx21 modification of "nSt" a configuration parameter Switch on Shutdown 6 CMD = 16#0007 3 CMD = 16#0006 (motor stopped) Switched on ATV ready ETA = 16#xx23 "nSt" Enable Disable operation 4 5 operation CMD = 16#xxxF CMD = 16#0007 Operation enabled ATV running ETA = 16#xx27 "rUn. . dCb" 3A Enable operation CMD = 16#xxxF Quick stop CMD = 16#000B 11 Examples: ETA = 16#0627 : Normal stop or Forward operation. 7 . The drive functions are activated and voltage is applied to the motor terminals. the consistency check must be enabled (CMI W8504. If all or part of the configuration and settings are to be loaded. but voltage has not yet been applied to the output. bit 15 = 0). The drive function is disabled. Quick stop active (Emergency stop active): Fast stop. The drive is locked. The power stage of the drive is ready to operate. In the "Switched on" state. Modifying a configuration parameter (motor stopped) returns the drive to the "Switch on disabled" state. The drive is locked. modifying a configuration parameter returns the drive to the "Switch on disabled" state. The drive is locked. On completion of the transfer. Each state represents an aspect of the internal behaviour of the drive. Restarting is only possible after the drive has changed to the "Switch on disabled" state. This chart evolves according to whether the control word is sent (CMD W8501) or an event occurs (example: lock following malfunction).Supervision and control in LINE mode The Altivar control process using the communication bus conforms to the CANopen DS402 profile status chart compatible with the DRIVECOM standard. Ready to switch on and Switched on (Drive initialized): The configuration and adjustment parameters can be modified. Transient state invisible to the communication bus. we recommend disabling the consistency check function during the transfer (CMI W8504. The configuration and adjustment parameters can be modified. Malfunction (Fault): The drive is faulty. Operation enabled (Operational): Only the adjustment parameters can be modified. Not ready to switch on (Initialization): Communication is being initialized. Auto-tuning (tUn) requires an injection of current. Malfunction reaction active (Reaction on fault): Transient state during which the drive performs an action appropriate to the type of fault. The drive must therefore be in this state for this command. bit 15 = 1). The drive status can be identified by the value of the status word (ETA W3201). Switch on disabled (Configuration): Initialization of the drive is complete. to use bit 15 to switch the ramp. 10 Fault reset 15 x x 0 1 x 0V1 x x x x x: State not significant 0 V 1: Change from 0 to 1 8 . 8 3 4 5 7. 10. simply configure LAC = L3 (Access to advanced functions and management of mixed modes) and set the "Ramp switching rPS" configuration parameter to Cd15. 6. 12 11 bit 7 Final state Ready to switch on Switched on Operation enabled Switched on Switch on disabled Quick stop active Switch on disabled Switch on disabled Reset x x x x x bit 3 Enable operation x x 1 0 x bit 2 Quick stop 1 1 1 1 x bit 1 Disable voltage 1 1 1 1 0 bit 0 Switch on 0 1 1 1 x Typical value of CMD (W8501) 16#0006 16#0007 16#000F 16#0007 16#0000 16#000B or 16#0002 16#0080 Quick stop 7. For example. Command Shut down Switch on Enable operation Disable operation Disable voltage Transition address 2.Supervision and control in LINE mode CMD control word (W8501) bit 7 Fault reset bit 6 0 bit 5 0 bit 4 0 bit 3 Enable operation bit 11 (1) bit 2 Quick stop (active at 0) bit 10 0 bit 1 Disable voltage (active at 0) bit 9 0 bit 0 Switch on bit 15 (1) bit 14 (1) bit 13 (1) bit 12 (1) bit 8 0 (1)This bit action depends on the LAC "Access levels" parameter and the functions configured by the user. 9. 9 .Supervision and control in LINE mode ETA status word (W3201) bit 7 Alarm bit 6 Switch on disabled bit 14 Stop via STOP key bit 5 Quick stop active at 0 bit 13 0 bit 4 0 (1) bit 12 0 bit 3 Malfunction bit 2 Operation enabled bit 10 Reference reached bit 1 Switched on bit 0 Ready to switch on bit 8 0 bit 15 Direction of rotation bit 11 Reference exceeded bit 9 Forced local mode (active at 0) State Not ready to switch on Switch on disabled Ready to switch on Switched on Operation enabled Malfunction Malfunction reaction active Quick stop active x: State not significant bit 6 Switch on disabled 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 bit 5 Quick stop x x 1 1 1 x x 0 bit 3 Malfunction 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 bit 2 Operation enabled 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 bit 1 Switched on 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 bit 0 Ready to switch on 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 ETA (W3201) masked by 16#006F 16#0000 16#0020 16#0040 16#0060 16#0021 16#0023 16#0027 16#0008 16#0028 16#000F 16#002F 16#0007 (1)Bit 4 of the ETA status word corresponds to DRIVECOM’s "Voltage disabled". this function is locked if local control is active (tCC = LOC). Reverse On the ATV31pppA range only. Flying restart This is only possible for 2-wire level detection control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO). first check that the incompatible functions are not assigned.speed (1) PI regulator Fast stop . If there is an incompatibility between functions. Stop functions have priority over run commands.Function compatibility Incompatible functions The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below: Automatic restart This is only possible for 2-wire level detection control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO). This function is locked if automatic injection on stopping is configured as DC (AdC = Ct). Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references. The user must therefore ensure that these functions can be used at the same time. the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured.speed (1) Management of limit switches Preset speeds PI regulator Jog operation Brake sequence DC injection stop Fast stop Freewheel stop p p X p X p p p A p p p p p p p A p A p p p X X p p X p p p A A (1)Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2. especially "Preset speeds" and "Summing inputs" which are assigned by default in the factory setting. 10 Freewheel stop Preset speeds Jog operation +/. p Incompatible functions Compatible functions N/A Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time): The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the X A other. A single input can activate several functions at the same time (reverse and 2nd ramp for example). Management of limit switches DC injection stop Brake sequence Summing inputs Summing inputs +/. Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible. To configure a function. Logic and analog input application functions Each of the functions can be assigned to one of the inputs. Function compatibility table The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one another. A) or on the remote display terminal bit 14 = 1: Stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31.. bit 0: Ready to switch on bit 1: Switched on bit 2: Operation enabled bit 3 = 0: No fault bit 3 = 1: Malfunction. bit 0: "Switch on": active at 1 bit 1: "Disable Voltage": active at 0 bit 2: "Quick Stop": active at 0 bit 3: "Enable Operation": active at 1 bits 4 to 6: Reserved: set to 0 bit 7: Fault reset: active on rising edge 0 -> 1 bits 8 to 10: Reserved: set to 0 For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L1 or L2: bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command bit 12 = 0: No action bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt "Stop type" parameter bit 13 = 0: No action bit13 = 1: Injection stop command bit 14 = 0: No action bit14 = 1: Fast stop command bit 15: Reserved: set to 0 For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L3: Factory assignments bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command bit 12 = 0: No action bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt "Stop type" parameter bit 13: No action bit 14: No action bit 15: No action These 5 bits can be assigned to functions. simply set the "Ramp switching" rPS configuration parameter (page 33) to Cd15. Speed reference via the bus (signed value) DSP402: vl target velocity DRIVECOM: Nominal speed value Unit: • 1 = 1 rpm if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0 • 1 ≈ 0. LSP and HSP in Hz bits 12 and 13: Reserved bit 14 = 0: No stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31.. For example.. fault present (FAI) bit 4: Voltage disabled bit 5: Quick stop bit 6: Switch on disabled bit 7 = 0: No alarm bit 7 = 1: Alarm present bit 8: Reserved bit 9 = 0: Forced local mode in progress (FLO) bit 9 = 1: No forced local mode bit 10 = 0: Reference not reached (transient state) bit 10 = 1: Reference reached (steady state) bit 11 = 0: LFRD reference normal bit 11 = 1: LFRD reference exceeded (< LSP or > HSP) Caution: LFRD is expressed in rpm.018 Hz (resolution 32767 points = 600 Hz) if bit 9 of CMI = 1 DRIVECOM status word Identical to ETA (page 16). to use bit 15 to switch the ramp..A) or on the remote display terminal bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation (output frequency) bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation (output frequency) 8602 6042 LFRD R/W 8603 6041 ETAD R 11 .DRIVECOM variables Modbus address 8601 CANopen Read/ Code address Write 6040 CMDD R/W Name/Description/Possible values DRIVECOM control word Identical to CMD (page 14). Speed delta Speed for calculation of acceleration ramp Unit: 1 rpm 32-bit word (low order: 8611.018 Hz (resolution 32767 points = 600 Hz) if bit 9 of CMI = 1 Fault code DSP402: Error code DRIVECOM: Malfunction code 0000H = "nOF": No fault saved 1000H = "CrF": Capacitor pre-charge fault or = "OLF": Motor overload fault or = "SOF": Motor overspeed fault 2310H = "OCF": Overcurrent fault 2320H = "SCF": Impeding short-circuit fault or = "SCF": Power module fault. but in rpm Unit: 1 rpm 32-bit word (low order: 8609. high order: 8610) Adjustment range: LSP (page 23) to tFR (page 27) Acceleration .20 mA fault on AI3 7510H = "SLF": Modbus communication fault 8100H = "COF": CANopen communication fault 9000H = "EPF": External fault FF00H = "tnF": Auto-tuning fault FF01H = "bLF": Brake control fault Min. equivalent to LSP (page 23). high order: 8612) Adjustment range: 1 to 65535 Acceleration . speed DSP402: vl velocity max amount DRIVECOM: Speed max amount High speed. but in rpm Unit: 1 rpm 32-bit word (low order: 8607. specific to ATV31pD15p 2330H = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (to earth) 2340H = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (phase to phase) 3110H = "OSF": Line supply overvoltage fault 3120H = "USF": Line supply undervoltage fault 3130H = "PHF": Line supply phase loss fault 3310H = "ObF": DC bus overvoltage fault or = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault or = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault .Time delta Time for calculation of acceleration ramp (time to go from 0 to SPAL) Unit: 1 s Adjustment range: 0 to 65535 8604 6044 RFRD R 8606 603F ERRD R 8607 8608 6046 / 1 SMIL R/W 8609 8610 6046 / 2 SMAL R/W 8611 8612 6048 / 1 SPAL R/W 8613 6048 / 2 SPAT R/W 12 . speed DSP402: vl velocity min amount DRIVECOM: Speed min amount Low speed.3 phases 4210H = "OHF": Drive overheating fault 5520H = "EEF": EEPROM memory fault 6100H = "InF": Internal fault 6300H = "CFF": Configuration (parameters) incorrect or = "CFI": Configuration (parameters) invalid 7300H = "LFF": 4 .DRIVECOM variables Modbus address 8605 CANopen Read/ Code address Write 6043 FRHD R Name/Description/Possible values Speed reference (signed ramp input) DSP402: vl velocity demand DRIVECOM: Reference speed variable Unit: 1 rpm Output speed (signed value) DSP402: vl control effort DRIVECOM: Actual speed value Unit: • 1 = 1 rpm if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0 • 1 ≈ 0. equivalent to HSP (page 23). high order: 8608) Adjustment range: 0 to HSP (page 23) Max. DRIVECOM variables Modbus address 8614 8615 CANopen Read/ Code address Write 6049 / 1 SPDL R/W Name/Description/Possible values Deceleration .Speed delta Speed for calculation of deceleration ramp Unit: 1 rpm 32-bit word (low order: 8614.Time delta Time for calculation of deceleration ramp (time to go from SPDL to 0) Unit: 1 s Adjustment range: 0 to 65535 8616 6049 / 2 SPDT R/W 13 . high order: 8615) Adjustment range: 1 to 65535 Deceleration . 1% Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 8502 2037 / 3 LFr R/W 8503 2037 / 4 PISP R/W 14 .1 Hz if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0 • 1 ≈ 0. For example. Frequency reference via the bus (signed value) Unit: • 1 = 0.Control variables Modbus address 8501 CANopen address 2037 / 2 Code CMD Read/ Write R/W Name/Description/Possible values Control word bit 0: "Switch on": active at 1 bit 1: "Disable Voltage": active at 0 bit 2: "Quick Stop": active at 0 bit 3: "Enable Operation": active at 1 bits 4 to 6: Reserved: set to 0 bit 7: Fault reset: active on rising edge 0 -> 1 bits 8 to 10: Reserved: set to 0 For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L1 or L2: bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command bit 12 = 0: No action bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt "Stop type" parameter bit 13 = 0: No action bit13 = 1: Injection stop command bit 14 = 0: No action bit14 = 1: Fast stop command bit 15: Reserved: set to 0 For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L3: Factory assignments bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command bit 12 = 0: No action bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt "Stop type" parameter bit 13: No action bit 14: No action bit 15: No action These 5 bits can be assigned to functions.018 Hz (resolution 32767 points = 600 Hz) if bit 9 of CMI = 1 PI regulator reference via the bus Unit: 0. simply set the "Ramp switching" rPS configuration parameter (page 33) to Cd15. to use bit 15 to switch the ramp. This bit automatically resets to 0 when the request is taken into account.5 = 0. This bit automatically resets to 0 when the request is taken into account. output speed and ouput frequency in physical units: rpm and Hz) bit 9 = 1: High resolution (references. parameters cannot be written. 1 = active) bits 0 to 7: Not accessible in write mode bit 8: Value of "R1" relay output.0 = 1).4 = ETI. During saving (ETI. or to 20 mA if AO1t = OA or 4A (page 28) 5240 2016 / 29 IOLR R/W 5261 2016 / 3E AO1R R/W 15 . bits 2 and 3: Reserved bit 4 = 0: No action bit 4 = 1: Ramp switching command bits 4 to 8: Reserved bit 9 = 0: Normal resolution (references. accessible in write mode if R1 is not assigned bit 9: Value of "R2" relay output.Control variables Modbus address 8504 CANopen address 2037 / 5 Code CMI Read/ Write R/W Name/Description/Possible values Extended control word bit 0 = 0: No action bit 0 = 1: Recall factory settings command. inhibiting the Modbus communication fault (NTO) should be restricted to the debug phase or to special applications. accessible in write mode if R2 is not assigned bit 10: Value of "LO" logic output. It is only active when the drive has come to a complete stop: ETI. output speed and ouput frequency in 32767 points for 600 Hz) bits 10 to 12: Reserved bit 13 = 0: Drive not locked on standstill bit 13 = 1: Drive locked on standstill bit 14 = 0: Control with Modbus communication monitoring bit 14 = 1: Control with no Modbus communication monitoring (NTO) For safety reasons. accessible in write mode if LO is not assigned bits 11 to 13: Reserved bit 14: Not accessible in write mode bit 15: Reserved Value of the analog output AO1R is accessible in write mode if dO (page 29) is not assigned Variation range: 0 to 10000 The value 10000 corresponds to 10V if AO1t = 10U. bit 1 = 0: No action bit 1 = 1: Save configuration/adjustments in EEPROM if voltage is sufficient (no USF fault). bit 15 = 0: Parameter consistency check bit 15 = 1: No parameter consistency check + drive locked on standstill (switching this bit to 0 will revalidate all parameters) Value of logic I/O (0 = inactive. Monitoring variables Modbus address 3201 CANopen address 2002 / 2 Code ETA R Read/ Write Name/Description/Possible values Status word bit 0: Ready to switch on bit 1: Switched on bit 2: Operation enabled bit 3 = 0: No fault bit 3 = 1: Malfunction.. Can be reset to zero by the rPr parameter (see page 48). Motor power Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal motor power.. calculated using the configuration parameters.1 Hz Current in the motor Unit: 0. Line voltage Unit: 0.018 Hz (resolution 32767 points = 600 Hz) if bit 9 of CMI = 1 Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value) Unit: 0. 3202 2002 / 3 rFr R 3203 3204 3205 2002 / 4 2002 / 8 2002 / 6 FrH LCr Otr R R R 3211 2002 / C OPr R 3207 2002 / 5 ULn R 3209 2002 / A tHd R 3210 2002 / B TDM R 9630 2042 / 1F tHr R 3231 2002 / 20 rtH R 16 .A) or on the remote display terminal bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation (output frequency) bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation (output frequency) Output frequency applied to the motor (signed value) Unit: • 1 = 0.1 Hz if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0 • 1 ≈ 0. motor running or stopped) Drive thermal state Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OHF" threshold (drive overheating) Max. Motor thermal state Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OLF" threshold (motor overload) Operating time Unit: 1 Hour Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 65535 Total time the motor has been powered up. calculated using the configuration parameters. LSP and HSP in Hz bits 12 and 13: Reserved bit 14 = 0: No stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31..A) or on the remote display terminal bit 14 = 1: Stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31. thermal state reached by the drive Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OHF" threshold (drive overheating) Automatically reset to zero when the drive is powered down.1 A Motor torque Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal motor torque. fault present (FAI) bit 4: Voltage disabled (still equals 0) bit 5: Quick stop bit 6: Switch on disabled bit 7 = 0: No alarm bit 7 = 1: Alarm present bit 8: Reserved bit 9 = 0: Forced local mode in progress (FLO) bit 9 = 1: No forced local mode bit 10 = 0: Reference not reached (transient state) bit 10 = 1: Reference reached (steady state) bit 11 = 0: LFRD reference normal bit 11 = 1: LFRD reference exceeded (< LSP or > HSP) Caution: LFRD is expressed in rpm..1 V (gives the line voltage via the DC bus. Motor speed in customer units ..Low order Unit: 1 USPL/USPH = rFr x SdS on 32 bits (see pages 25 and 16). 1 bit 0: Reserved bit 1 = 0: No drive fault bit 1 = 1: Drive fault bit 2 = 0: Motor stopped bit 2 = 1: Motor running bit 3: Reserved bit 4 = 0: Frequency threshold (Ftd) not reached bit 4 = 1: Frequency threshold (Ftd) reached bit 5 = 0: High speed not reached bit 5 = 1: High speed reached bit 6 = 0: Current threshold (Ctd) not reached bit 6 = 1: Current threshold (Ctd) reached bit 7 = 0: Speed reference not reached bit 7 = 1: Speed reference reached bit 8 = 0: No motor thermal overload alarm bit 8 = 1: Motor thermal overload alarm bit 9 = 0: No brake control (brake engaged) bit 9 = 1: Brake control in progress (brake released) bits 10 and 11: Reserved bit 12 = 0: No loss of 4-20 mA fault bit 12 = 1: Loss of 4-20 mA fault bit 13: Reserved bit 14 = 0: No drive thermal overload alarm bit 14 = 1: Drive thermal overload alarm bit 15: Reserved 12003 205A / 4 USPH R 3206 2002 / 7 ETI R 3250 2002 / 33 LRS1 R 17 .High order Unit: 1 USPL/USPH = rFr x SdS on 32 bits (see pages 25 and 16)..A) bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via the remote display terminal bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via ModBus bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via CanOpen bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation requested (reference) bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation requested (reference) Extended status word No. Extended status word bit 0 = 0: Write parameters authorized bit 0 = 1: Write parameters not authorized (the drive is in the process of saving the current parameters from the RAM to the EEPROM) bit 1 = 0: No parameter consistency check + drive locked on standstill bit 1 = 1: Parameter consistency check bit 2 = 0: Fault reset not authorized bit 2 = 1: Fault reset authorized bit 3: Reserved bit 4 = 0: Motor stopped bit 4 = 1: Motor running bit 5 = 0: No DC injection bit 5 = 1: DC injection bit 6 = 0: Drive in steady state bit 6 = 1: Drive in transient state bit 7 = 0: No motor thermal overload alarm bit 7 = 1: Motor thermal overload alarm bit 8 = 0: No alarm if excessive braking bit 8 = 1: Alarm if excessive braking bit 9 = 0: Drive not accelerating bit 9 = 1: Drive accelerating bit 10 = 0: Drive not decelerating bit 10 = 1: Drive decelerating bit 11 = 0: No current limit alarm bit 11 = 1: Current limit alarm bit 12 = 0: Fast stop not in progress bit 12 = 1: Fast stop in progress bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via terminal block or built-in keypad (ATV31..Monitoring variables Modbus address 12002 CANopen Read/ Code address Write 205A / 3 USPL R Name/Description/Possible values Motor speed in customer units . also accessible in write mode if R1 is not assigned bit 9: Value of "R2" relay output.A drive potentiometer) Unit: 1 mV Variation range: 0 to 10000 Value of analog input AI1 Unit: 1 mV Variation range: 0 to 10000 Value of analog input AI2 Unit: 1 mV Variation range: -10000 to 10000 Value of analog input AI3 Unit: 1 µA Variation range: 0 to 20000 Value of the analog output AO1R is also accessible in write mode if dO (page 29) is not assigned Variation range: 0 to 10000 The value 10000 corresponds to 10V if AO1t = 10U. also accessible in write mode if LO is not assigned bit 11: Reserved bit 12: Reserved bit 13: Reserved bit 14: 0 = AOC/AOV logic output. 1 = AOC/AOV analog output bit 15: Reserved Value of analog input AIP (ATV31…. or to 20 mA if AO1t = OA or 4A (page 28) 5240 2016 / 29 IOLR R 5241 2016 / 2A AIPC R 5242 2016 / 2B AI1C R 5243 2016 / 2C AI2C R 5244 2016 / 2D AI3C R 5261 2016 / 3E AO1R R 18 . 3 bit 0 = 0: The reference is given by Fr1 bit 0 = 1: The reference is given by Fr2 bit 1 = 0: The command is given by Fr1 or Cd1 bit 1 = 1: The command is given by Fr2 or Cd2 bit 2 = 0: ACC and DEC are used as ramp parameters bit 2 = 1: ACC2 and DEC2 are used as ramp parameters bit 3 = 0: CLI is used for current limiting bit 3 = 1: CL2 is used for current limiting bits 4 to 10: Reserved bit 11 = 0: Motor 1 is not used bit 11 = 1: Motor 1 is used bit 12 = 0: Motor 2 is not used bit 12 = 1: Motor 2 is used bits 13 to 15: Reserved Value of logic I/O (0 = inactive. 1 = present bit 8: Value of "R1" relay output. 1 = active) bit 0: Value of logic input "LI1" bit 1: Value of logic input "LI2" bit 2: Value of logic input " LI3" bit 3: Value of logic input " LI4" bit 4: Value of logic input " LI5" bit 5: Value of logic input " LI6" bit 6: Reserved bit 7: Keypad presence: 0 = absent.Monitoring variables Modbus address 3252 CANopen address 2002 / 35 Code LRS3 R Read/ Write Name/Description/Possible values Extended status word No. also accessible in write mode if R2 is not assigned bit 10: Value of "LO" logic output. 3 (Same format as "LFt" page 19) Past fault No.3 phases 34 = "COF": Communication fault line 2 (CANopen) 35 = "bLF": Brake control fault 36 = "SCF": Power module fault. 2 (Same format as "LFt" page 19) Past fault No. but LFt is reset after powering down the drive then powering up again.Monitoring variables Modbus address 7121 CANopen address 2029 / 16 Code LFt R Read/ Write Name/Description/Possible values Last fault The fault remains saved even if the fault disappears. 4 (Same format as "LFt" page 19) 7201 7202 7203 7204 202A / 2 202A / 3 202A / 4 202A / 5 DP1 DP2 DP3 DP4 R R R R 19 . 0 = "nOF": No fault saved 3 = "CFF": Configuration (parameters) incorrect 4 = "CFI": Configuration (parameters) invalid 5 = "SLF": Modbus communication fault 8 = "EPF": External fault 9 = "OCF": Overcurrent fault 10 = "CrF": Capacitor pre-charge fault 13 = "LFF": 4 . specific to ATV31pD15p Past fault No. 1 (Same format as "LFt" page 19) Past fault No.20 mA fault on AI3 16 = "OHF": Drive overheating fault 17 = "OLF": Motor overload fault 18 = "ObF": DC bus overvoltage fault 19 = "OSF": Line supply overvoltage fault 20 = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault 21 = "PHF": Line supply phase loss fault 22 = "USF": Line supply undervoltage fault 23 = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (phase to phase) 24 = "SOF": Motor overspeed fault 25 = "tnF": Auto-tuning fault 26 to 29 = "InF": Internal fault 30 = "EEF": EEPROM memory fault 31 = "SCF": Impeding short-circuit fault 32 = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (to earth) 33 = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault . 15: .0: No motor thermal overload alarm .8: Reserved bit 9 = Same as ETI.4: .1: Drive ready (RDY) bit 1 = Same as ETA.6: .0: No SWITCH ON DISABLED status .bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via the remote display terminal .5: .0: No DC injection .0: Forward rotation requested (reference) .bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via ModBus . 1 bit 0 = Same as ETA.0: Drive not decelerating .1: Drive decelerating bit 11 = Same as ETI.bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via terminal block or built-in keypad (ATV31.7: .1: Reverse rotation (output frequency) bit 5 = Same as ETI.Monitoring variables Modbus address 7211 CANopen address 202A / C Code EP1 R Read/ Write Name/Description/Possible values Status of past fault No.1: DC injection bit 7 = Same as ETI.A) . 2 (Same format as "EP1") Status of past fault No.1: Reverse rotation requested (reference) Status of past fault No..0: Motor stopped .1: Drive accelerating bit 10 = Same as ETI.1: Motor running bit 6 = Same as ETI.1: SWITCH ON DISABLED status bit 3 = Same as ETA.5: .9: Reserved bit 4 = Same as ETA.1: .bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via CanOpen bit 15 = Same as ETI.1: Current limit alarm bit 12 = Same as ETI. 4 (Same format as "EP1") CANopen: error word Unit: 1 Range: 0 to 4 0: "No error" 1: "Bus off error" 2: "Life time error" 3: "CAN overrun" 4: "Heartbeat error" Image of Modbus extended control word (received by the Modbus channel) Identical to CMI (page 15).11: .10: ...0: No current limit alarm .15: .13 and ETI.9: .12: Reserved bits 13 and 14 = Same as ETI.0: Drive not accelerating .14: . 7212 7213 7214 6056 202A / D 202A / E 202A / F 201E / 39 EP2 EP3 EP4 R R R ErCO R 8541 2037 / 2A CMI1 R 20 .0: Drive not ready . 3 (Same format as "EP1") Status of past fault No.1: Motor thermal overload alarm bit 8 = Same as ETI.0: Forward rotation (output frequency) .0: Emergency stop in progress .1: No emergency stop bit 2 = Same as ETA. Monitoring variables Modbus address 8542 CANopen address 2037 / 2B Code CMI2 R Read/ Write Name/Description/Possible values Image of CANopen extended control word (received by the CANopen channel) Identical to CMI (page 15). 8521 2037 / 16 LFR1 R 8522 2037 / 17 LFR2 R 8631 2038 / 20 LFD1 R 8632 2038 / 21 LFD2 R 8531 2037 / 20 PIR1 R 8532 2037 / 21 PIR2 R 21 . Image of Modbus speed reference Speed reference received by the Modbus channel Identical to LFRD (page 11) Image of CANopen speed reference Speed reference received by the CANopen channel Identical to LFRD (page 11) Image of Modbus PI reference (received by the Modbus channel) Identical to PISP (page 14). Image of CANopen frequency reference (received by the CANopen channel) Identical to LFr (page 14). Image of Modbus frequency reference (received by the Modbus channel) Identical to LFr (page 14). Image of CANopen PI reference (received by the CANopen channel) Identical to PISP (page 14). 2 kW) 8 = U30 (3 kW) 9 = U40 (4 kW) 10 = U55 (5..18 kW) 2 = 037 (0.55 kW) 4 = 075 (0.75 kW) 5 = U11 (1.high order byte: firmware version (V) in hexadecimal format Example : For V1.37 kW) 3 = 055 (0. .5 kW) 11 = U75 (7...600 V 3-phase) Nominal drive current Unit: 0.5 kW) 12 = D11 (11 kW) 13 = D15 (15 kW) Drive voltage 0 = unknown 1 = M2 (200...Identification variables Modbus address 3011 CANopen address 2000 / C Code NCV R Read/ Write Name/Description/Possible values Drive rating 0 = unknown 1 = 018 (0..1 kW) 6 = U15 (1.240 V single phase) 2 = M3X (200.5 kW) 7 = U22 (2.240 V 3-phase) 3 = N4 (380. UdP = 16#1204 3012 2000 / D VCAL R 3017 3010 2000 / 12 2000 / B INV ZON R R 3401 2004 / 2 TSP R 3302 2000 / 4 UdP R 22 ..2 IE04.1 A Drive type 0 = unknown 1 = ATV31……(drive without built-in keypad) 3 = ATV31……(drive with built-in keypad) Drive firmware type The firmware type is specified by an ASCII letter "A": Standard firmware Drive firmware version Coded on 2 bytes..500 V 3-phase) 4 = S6X (525.low order byte: firmware upgrade index (UI) in hexadecimal format . Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive. If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state. thermal current Unit: 0.For UFt (page 27) = n or nLd: IR compensation . Skip frequency Unit: 0. according to the dynamics of the machine. Frequency loop stability Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 Parameter active only if UFt (page 27) = n or nLd.For UFt = L or P: Voltage boost Used to optimize torque at very low speed (increase UFr if the torque is insufficient). IR compensation/Voltage boost Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 . Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed. Check that the value of UFr is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability).2 to 1. Frequency loop gain Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 Parameter active only if UFt (page 27) = n or nLd. reference): Ensure that this setting is suitable for the motor and the application. The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact.1 A Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0. This function prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 3105 CANopen address 2001 / 6 Code LSP Read/ Write R/W Name/Description/Possible values Low speed Unit: 0. reference) High speed Unit: 0. Motor thermal protection .1 Hz Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JPF. if bFr = 60: 600 Adjustment range: LSP to tFr (Motor frequency at max.max. Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration). Too high a gain may result in operating instability. Please refer to OLL on page 47 if you wish to suppress thermal protection.5 In (1) Set ItH to the nominal current on the motor rating plate. Modifying UFt (page 27) will cause UFr to return to the factory setting (20%). 3104 2001 / 5 HSP R/W 9622 2042 / 17 ItH R/W 9623 2042 / 18 UFr R/W 9620 2042 / 15 FLG R/W 9621 2042 / 16 StA R/W 9625 2042 / 1A SLP R/W 11301 2053 / 2 JPF R/W 23 .1 Hz Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to HSP (Motor frequency at min. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. The FLG parameter adjusts the following of the speed ramp on the basis of the inertia of the machine being driven. Slip compensation Unit: 1% Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 150 Parameter active only if UFt (page 27) = n or nLd.1 Hz Factory setting: if bFr = 50: 500. If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable. 1 Hz Factory setting: bFr Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Motor frequency threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2 = FtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = StA) Motor thermal state threshold Unit: 1% Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 118 Motor thermal state threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2 = tSA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = tSA) Motor current threshold Unit: 0. Motor frequency threshold Unit: 0. Current limit Unit: 0. nd 9201 203E / 2 CLI R/W 11701 2057 / 2 tLS R/W 11003 2050 / 4 Ftd R/WS 11002 2050 / 3 ttd R/WS 11001 2050 / 2 Ctd R/WS 24 . The motor restarts if the frequency reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present.5 In (1) Motor current threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2 = CtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = CtA) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Low speed operating time Unit: 0.5 In (1) Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor.1 s Factory setting: 0 (no time limit) Adjustment range: 0 to 9999 Following operation at LSP for a defined period.1 Hz Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JF2. This function prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance.5 In (1) Adjustment range: 0.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 11302 CANopen address 2053 / 3 Code JF2 Read/ Write R/W Name/Description/Possible values 2 skip frequency Unit: 0. a motor stop is requested automatically.1 A Factory setting: 1. value 0 corresponds to an unlimited time. Caution.25 to 1.1 A Factory setting: In (1) Adjustment range: 0 to 1. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Ftd page 24. Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate Unit: 1 V Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range according to drive rating: ATV31ppp M2: 100 to 240 V ATV31ppp M3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31ppp N4: 100 to 500 V ATV31ppp S6X: 100 to 600 V Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate Unit: 0.menu (See Programming Manual) Standard motor frequency Factory setting: 0 0 = "50" 1 = "60" 50 Hz: IEC 60 Hz: NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP page 23. ATV31ppp M3X: 7 max.25 to 1. Unit: 0.1 Factory setting: 300 Adjustment range: 1 to 2000 This parameter also affects the display parameter SPd1/SPd2/SPd3 in the SUP.5 In (1) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Nominal motor current given on the rating plate Unit: 0. ATV31ppp S6X: 17 max.1 A Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0. ATV31ppp N4: 14 max. FrS page 25 and tFr page 27.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 12001 CANopen address 205A / 2 Code SdS Read/ Write R/W Name/Description/Possible values USPL/USPH scale factor (USPL/USPH = rFr x SdS) See USPL/USPH page 17. 25 .1 Hz Factory setting: if bFr = 50: 500 if bFr = 60: 600 Adjustment range: 100 to 5000 The ratio UnS (in volts) must not exceed the following values: FrS (in Hz) 3015 2000 / 10 bFr R/WS 9601 2042 / 2 UnS R/WS 9602 2042 / 3 FrS R/WS 9603 2042 / 4 nCr R/WS ATV31ppp M2: 7 max. 9608 2042 / 9 tUn R/WO Motor control auto-tuning Factory setting: 0 It is essential that all the motor parameters (UnS. wait for the display to change to "dOnE" or "nO".slip as a % 100 50 . 1 = "InIt": Activates the function. this input must be set to 1 (active at 0). To improve low-speed performance whatever the thermal state of the motor. 26 .Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 9604 CANopen address 2042 / 5 Code nSP Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate Unit: 1 rpm Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0 to 32767 RPM 0 to 9999 RPM then 10. At the next run command or the next power-up. nSP. the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %. the stator resistance is measured with an auto-tune. nCr. Value XXXX can be forced or changed using the keys. FrS. Caution: tUn is forced to POn if rSC is other than nO.00 to 32. When rSC = InIt. rather than the nominal speed. Parameter rSC then changes to this value (XXXX) and maintains it. 112 = "YES": Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function has been assigned to a logic input. XXXX corresponds to half the resistance measured between 2 phases.76 KRPM If. calculate the nominal speed as follows: Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x 100 . >1 =" XXXX" XXXX: Value of cold state stator resistance used. then the parameter automatically switches to dOnE or nO in the event of a fault (the tnF fault is displayed if tnL = YES. 114 = "rUn": Auto-tuning is performed every time a run command is sent. Caution: It is strongly recommended that this function is activated for Lifting and Handling applications. For applications which do not require high performance or do not tolerate automatic auto-tuning (passing a current through the motor) each time the drive is powered up. Do not interrupt. COS) are correctly configured before performing the auto-tuning. Auto-tuning is only performed if no command has been activated. 113 = "dOnE": Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed.01 Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 50 to 100 Cold state stator resistance Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive. 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 LI1 to LI6: Auto-tuning is performed on the transition from 0 V 1 of a logic input assigned to this function. in mΩ. The function should be activated (InIt) only when the motor is in cold state. Parameter rSC remains at InIt as long as the measurement has not been performed. see page 48).slip in Hz 60 (50 Hz motors) (60 Hz motors) 9606 2042 / 7 COS R/WS 9643 2042 / 2C rSC R/WS Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate Unit: 0. 115 = "POn": Auto-tuning is performed on every power-up. parameter tUn is forced to POn.slip in Hz 50 60 . 0 = "nO": Auto-tuning not performed. Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. During auto-tuning the motor operates at nominal current. tUn remains forced to POn. Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio Factory setting: 2 0 = "L": Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors 1 = "P": Variable torque for pump and fan applications 2 = "n": Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications 3 = "nLd": Energy saving. 1 = "YES": The speed loop filter is suppressed (in position control applications. 1 = "PEnd": Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed. Random switching frequency Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fixed frequency 1 = "YES": Frequency with random modulation Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency. 2 = "PrOG": Auto-tuning in progress. If the frequency has been set to a value higher than 4 kHz. 9607 2042 / 8 UFt R/WS 3107 2001 / 8 nrd R/WS 3102 2001 / 3 SFr R/W 3103 2001 / 4 tFr R/WS 9101 203D / 2 SrF R/WS 8001 2032 / 2 SCS R/WS 27 . SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load).1 kHz Factory setting: 40 Adjustment range: 20 to 160 The frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor. If the remote display terminal option is connected to the drive. this reduces the response time and the reference may be exceeded).Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 9609 CANopen address 2042 / A Code tUS R Read/ Write Name/Description/Possible values Auto-tuning status Factory setting: 0 0 =" tAb": The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor. in the event of excessive temperature rise. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve. 4 = "dOnE": The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor. They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. FIL2. 5 = "Strd": The cold state stator resistance (rSC other than nO) is used to control the motor. Switching frequency Unit: 0. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. 3 = "FAIL": Auto-tuning has failed. the following additional selection options will appear: 11 = "FIL1" 12 = "FIL2" 13 = "FIL3" 14 = "FIL4" FIL1. FIL4 are files available in the remote display terminal’s EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration. Saving the configuration Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive 2 = "Str1": Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and increase it again once the temperature has returned to normal. in addition to the current configuration. Maximum output frequency Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: if BFR = 50: 600 if BFR = 60: 720 Adjustment range: 100 to 5000 Suppression of the speed loop filter Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": The speed loop filter is active (prevents the reference being exceeded). FIL3. Changing the assignment of tCC returns the following functions to their factory setting: rrS.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 8002 CANopen address 2032 / 3 Code FCS Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Return to factory settings/Restore configuration Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive 2 = "rEC1": The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. If the remote display terminal option is connected to the drive. a "stop" pulse is sufficient to control stopping. etc. the following additional selection options appear. Reverse operation via logic input Factory setting: . tCt and all functions affecting logic inputs. but the "forward" input always takes priority over the "reverse" input. 2 = "PFO": State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop. in order to prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply.10 V configuration (use terminal AOV) 2 = "0A": 0 . FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed.if tCC = 2: 0 If rrS = nO.20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC) 3 = "4A": 4 . 4-20 mA. 20-4 mA. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. by means of negative voltage on AI2 for example.20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC) 11101 2051 / 2 tCC R/WS 11102 2051 / 3 tCt R/WS 11105 2051 / 6 rrS R/WS 4434 200E / 23 CrL3 R/WS 4444 200E / 2D CrH3 R/WS 4601 2010 / 2 AO1t R/WS 28 .1 mA Factory setting: 200 Adjustment range: 40 to 200 CrL3 and CrH3 are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA. Configuration of the analog output Factory setting: 2 1 = "10U": 0 . 2 = "LOC "= local control (drive RUN/STOP/RESET) for ATV31ppp A only (inactive if LAC = L3. etc. Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3 Unit: 0. 2-wire/3-wire control (Type of control) Factory setting: 0 except for ATV31ppp A: 2 Control configuration: 0 = "2C" = 2-wire control: The open or closed state of the input controls running or stopping. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3 Unit: 0. 20-4 mA. reverse operation is active.if tCC = 0: 130 . FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed.if tCC = 1: 131 . see page 30). 1 = "trn": A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation. 1 = "3C" = 3-wire control (pulse control): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to control starting. as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote display terminal’s EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): 11 = "FIL1": display terminal file 1 not empty 12 = "FIL2": display terminal file 2 not empty 13 = "FIL3": display terminal file 3 not empty 14 = "FIL4": display terminal file 4 not empty They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote display terminal. 64 = "InI": The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. 4-20 mA.1 mA Factory setting: 40 Adjustment range: 0 to 200 CrL3 and CrH3 are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA. Type of 2-wire control (parameter active only if tCC = 2C) Factory setting: 1 0 = "LEL ": State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop. Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 5031 CANopen address 2014 / 20 Code dO Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Analog/logic output AOC/AOV Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned For the following assignments the output is analog type: 129 = "OCr": Motor current. even if LFL = nO (page 48) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active. 130 = "OFr": Motor frequency. configure AO1t = 0A. 132 = "Otr": Motor torque. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive power. 1 = "FLt": Drive fault 2 = "rUn": Drive running 4 = "FtA": Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter page 24) 5 = "FLA": High speed (HSP) reached 6 = "CtA": Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter page 24) 7 = "SrA": Frequency reference reached 8 = "tSA": Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter page 24) 9 = "bLC": Brake sequence (for information. as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated via the bLC parameter page 42) 12 = "APL": Loss of 4-20 mA signal. with the exception of FLt (powered up if the drive is not faulty). For the following assignments the output is logic type (see diagram in the Installation Manual): With these assignments. even if LFL = nO (page 48) The logic output is in state 1 (24 V) when the selected assignment is active. Relay r1 Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "FLt": Drive fault 2 = "rUn": Drive running 4= "FtA": Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter page 24) 5 = "FLA": High speed (HSP) reached 6 = "CtA": Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter page 24) 7 = "SrA": Frequency reference reached 8 = "tSA": Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter page 24) 12 = "APL": Loss of 4-20 mA signal. 5001 2014 / 2 r1 R/WS 5002 2014 / 3 r2 R/WS 29 . 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal motor torque. with the exception of FLt (powered up if the drive is not faulty). 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to the maximum frequency tFr (page 27). as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated via the bLC parameter page 42) 12 = "APL": Loss of 4-20 mA signal. 139 = "OPr": Power supplied by the drive. Relay r2 Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "FLt": Drive fault 2 = "rUn": Drive running 4 = "FtA": Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter page 24) 5 = "FLA": High speed (HSP) reached 6 = "CtA": Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter page 24) 7 = "SrA": Frequency reference reached 8 = "tSA": Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter page 24) 9 = "bLC": Brake sequence (for information. with the exception of FLt (state 1 if the drive is not faulty). 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive current. even if LFL = nO (page 48) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active. Motor switching . Cd1 (page 31).Brake control . 164 = "Mdb": Reference via Modbus 167 = "CAn": Reference via CANopen (1) Caution. Significantly. 1 = "L2": Access to advanced functions: . LFr parameter page 14. 164 = "Mdb": Reference via Modbus 167 = "CAn": Reference via CANopen (1) Caution.speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote display terminal. LFr parameter page 14. For operation. For operation. The latter is forced to "2C" on ATV31 pppA. the following additional assignments are possible: 160 = "UPdt": (1) + speed/. the following additional assignments are possible: 163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal. Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel. Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel. Configuration reference 2 Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only) If LAC = L2 or L3. display the frequency rFr (see page 16) If LAC = L3. Assigning LAC to L3 will restore the factory settings of the Fr1 (below).Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 3006 CANopen address 2000 / 7 Code LAC Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Function access level Factory setting: 0 0 = "L1": Access to standard functions.+/. Configuration reference 1 Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31pppp A: 16 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only) If LAC = L2 or L3.speed via LI 161 = "UpdH": (1) + speed/.Management of limit switches 2 = L3: Access to advanced functions and management of mixed control modes.speed via LI 161 = "UpdH": (1) + speed/. the following additional assignments are possible: 163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal. this level is interchangeable with ATV28. display the frequency rFr (see page 16) If LAC = L3.speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote display terminal. L3 can only be restored to L2 or L1 and L2 to L1 by means of a "factory setting" via FCS (page 28). CHCF (page 31).speed (motorized potentiometer) . the following additional assignments are possible: 160 = "UPdt": (1) + speed/. r r 8413 2036 / E Fr1 R/WS 8414 2036 / F Fr2 R/WS 30 . you cannot assign UPdt to Fr1 or Fr2 and UPdH to Fr1 or Fr2 at the same time. you cannot assign UPdt to Fr1 or Fr2 and UPdH to Fr1 or Fr2 at the same time. and tCC (page 28) parameters.Switching for second current limit . Fr2 is active when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1. Switching channel may result in a change of direction of motor rotation. 96 = "Fr1": Reference = Reference 1 97 = "Fr2": Reference = Reference 2 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. 8401 2036 / 2 CHCF R/WS Mixed mode (control channels separated from reference channels) Factory setting: 1 Active if LAC = L3 1 = "SIM": Combined 2 = "SEP": Separate Configuration of control channel 1 Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31ppp A: 2 Active if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 1 = "tEr": Terminal block control 2 = "LOC": Keypad control (ATV31pppA only) 3 = "LCC": Remote display terminal control 10 = "Mdb": Control via Modbus 20 = "CAn": Control via CAN Configuration of control channel 2 Factory setting: 10 Active if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 1 = "tEr": Terminal block control 2 = "LOC": Keypad control (ATV31pppA only) 3 = "LCC": Remote display terminal control 10 = "Mdb": Control via Modbus 20 = "CAn": Control via CAN 8423 2036 / 18 Cd1 R/WS 8424 2036 / 19 Cd2 R/WS 31 . Fr1 is active when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0. the following additional assignments are possible: 187 188 189 190 191 203 205 206 207 = "C111": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "C112": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "C113": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "C114": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "C115": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page = "C211": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "C213": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "C214": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "C215": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus CANopen CANopen CANopen CANopen The reference can be switched with the drive running.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 8411 CANopen address 2036 / C Code rFC Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Reference switching Factory setting: 96 Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Fr1 or Fr2. 0 = "nO": No copy 1 = "SP": Copy reference 2 = "Cd": Copy control 3 = "ALL": Copy control and reference Exceptions: • If channel 2 is controlled via the terminal block (2-wire or 3-wire control). 8402 2036 / 3 COP R/WS Copy channel 1 to channel 2 Factory setting: 0 Active if LAC = L3 Copying is only performed from channel 1 to channel 2. remote display terminal or communication bus). AI3 or AIP). 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Enables control of the drive using the STOP/RESET.speed type. If the drive/terminal connection is cut or if the terminal has not been connected. Channel 2 is active when the input or control word bit is at state 1. Switching channel may result in a change of direction of motor rotation. • In other cases (built-in keypad. • If channel 2 reference is set via analog input (AI1. The speed reference is then given by parameter LFr page 14. the reference before ramp (FrH) is copied. RUN and FWD/REV buttons on the display terminal. fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. Control via remote display terminal Factory setting: 0 Parameter active only with the remote display terminal option and if LAC = L1 or L2. Stop priority Factory setting: 1 This function gives priority to the STOP key on the keypad (ATV31 pppA only) or the STOP key on the remote display terminal. regardless of the control channel (terminal block or communication bus). the copy is "overwritten" as soon as a new control or reference is received by the bus. channel 1 reference is not copied. the drive locks in an SLF fault. Note: If channel 2 is a communication bus. 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": STOP key priority 64003 2262 / 4 LCC R/WS 64002 2262 / 3 PSt R/WS 32 . AI2.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 8421 CANopen address 2036 / 16 Code CCS Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Control channel switching Factory setting: 98 Active if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 Parameter CCS can be used to select channel Cd1 or Cd2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Cd1 or Cd2. 98 = "Cd1": Control channel = Channel 1 99 = "Cd2": Control channel = Channel 2 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 187 = "C111": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 188 = "C112": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 189 = "C113": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 190 = "C114": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 191 = "C115": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 203 = "C211": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen 204 = "C212": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen 205 = "C213": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen 206 = "C214": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen 207 = "C215": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen Channel 1 is active when the input or control word bit is at state 0. channel 1 control is not copied. Reference copied: • If channel 2 is the +/. Only the freewheel. the output frequency applied to the motor (rFr) is copied. 0 = "dFr": Forward 1 = "drS": Reverse 2 = "bOt": Both directions are authorized (except for the keypad on the ATV31ppp A: Forward only).tA3 Acceleration ramp time Unit: 0. the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen 9004 203C / 5 rPt R/WS 9005 203C / 6 tA1 R/W 9006 203C / 7 tA2 R/W 9007 203C / 8 tA3 R/W 9008 203C / 9 tA4 R/W 9001 203C / 2 ACC R/W 9002 203C / 3 dEC R/W 9010 203C / B rPS R/WS ACC and dEC are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. Factory setting: 0 0 = "LIn": Linear 1 = "S": S ramp 2 = "U": U ramp 3 = "CUS": Customized Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time ACC or AC2) Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time ACC or AC2) Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 . Type of ramp Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps. 33 .tA1 Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time dEC or dE2) Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time dEC or dE2) Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 .Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 64001 CANopen address 2262 / 2 Code rOt Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Direction of operation authorized Factory setting: 0 Direction of operation authorized for the RUN key on the keypad (ATV31ppp A only) or the RUN key on the remote display terminal. Check that the value of dEC is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped. Ramp switching Factory setting: 0 This function remains active regardless of the control channel.1 s Factory setting: 30 Adjustment range: 1 to 9999 Defined for accelerating between 0 and the nominal frequency FrS (page 25). AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1. Deceleration ramp time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 30 Adjustment range: 1 to 9999 Defined for decelerating between the nominal frequency FrS (page 25) and 0. Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 9011 CANopen address 203C / C Code Frt Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Ramp switching threshold Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 The second ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not equal to 0 (0 deactivates the function) and the output frequency is greater than Frt. Threshold ramp switching can be combined with switching via LI or bit as follows: LI or bit 0 0 1 1 Frequency <Frt >Frt <Frt >Frt Ramp ACC, dEC AC2, dE2 AC2, dE2 AC2, dE2 9012 203C / D AC2 R/W 9013 203C / E dE2 R/W 9003 203C / 4 brA R/WS 11201 2052 / 2 Stt R/WS 11204 2052 / 5 FSt R/WS 2nd acceleration ramp time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 1 to 9999 Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt). 2nd deceleration ramp time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 1 to 9999 Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt). Deceleration ramp adaptation Factory setting: 1 Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at too low a value for the inertia of the load. 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Function active. The function is incompatible with applications requiring: - positioning on a ramp - the use of a braking resistor (no guarantee of the function operating correctly) brA is forced to nO if brake control bLC is assigned (page 42). Normal stop mode Factory setting: 0 Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command. 0 = "rMP": On ramp 1 = "FSt": Fast stop 2 = "nSt": Freewheel stop 3 = "dCI": DC injection stop Fast stop via logic input Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen The stop is activated when the logic state of the input changes to 0 and the control word bit changes to 1. The fast stop is a stop on a reduced ramp via parameter dCF. If the input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been configured (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 28). In other cases, a new run command must be sent. 34 Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 11230 CANopen address 2052 / 1F Code dCF Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp time for fast stopping Unit: 1 Factory setting: 4 Adjustment range: 0 to 10 Ensure that the reduced ramp is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped. The value 0 corresponds to the minimum ramp. DC injection via logic input Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen 11203 2052 / 4 dCI R/WS 11210 2052 / B IdC R/W 11211 2052 / C tdC R/W 11202 2052 / 3 nSt R/WS Braking is activated when the logic state of the input or control word bit is at 1. Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode Caution: This setting is not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function. Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: 0.7 In (1) Adjustment range: 0 to In (1) After 5 seconds the injection current is peak limited at 0.5 Ith if it is set at a higher value. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Total DC injection braking time selected as normal stop mode Caution: This setting is not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function. Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 5 Adjustment range: 1 to 300 Freewheel stop via logic input Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 The stop is activated when the logic state of the input is at 0. If the input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been configured. In other cases, a new run command must be sent. Automatic standstill DC injection (at the end of the ramp) Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": No injection 1 = "YES": Standstill injection for adjustable period 2 = "Ct": Continuous standstill injection This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent. 10401 204A / 2 AdC R/W 35 Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 10402 CANopen address 204A / 3 Code tdC1 Read/ Write R/W Name/Description/Possible values Automatic standstill DC injection time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 1 to 300 Level of automatic standstill DC injection current Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: 0.7 In (1) Adjustment range: 0 to 1.2 In (1) Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. 2nd automatic standstill DC injection time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 300 2nd level of standstill DC injection current Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: 0.5 In (1) Adjustment range: 0 to 1.2 In (1) Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Summing input 2 Factory setting: 2 Can be used to sum one or two inputs to reference Fr1 only. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (type A drives only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 14. 164 = "Mdb": Reference via Modbus 167 = "CAn": Reference via CANopen Summing input 3 Factory setting: 0 Can be used to sum one or two inputs to reference Fr1 only. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (type A drives only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 14. 164 = "Mdb": Reference via Modbus 167 = "CAn": Reference via CANopen 10403 204A / 4 SdC1 R/W 10404 204A / 5 tdC2 R/W 10405 204A / 6 SdC2 R/W 11801 2058 / 2 SA2 R/WS 11802 2058 / 3 SA3 R/WS 36 Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 11401 CANopen address 2054 / 2 Code PS2 Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values 2 preset speeds Factory setting: if tCC = 1: 0 if tCC = 0 or 2: 131 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 4 preset speeds Factory setting: if tCC = 1: 0 if tCC = 0 or 2: 132 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS2 has been assigned before assigning PS4. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 8 preset speeds Factory setting: 0 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS4 has been assigned before assigning PS8. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen 11402 2054 / 3 PS4 R/WS 11403 2054 / 4 PS8 R/WS 37 1 Hz Factory setting: 400 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 9th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 250 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 6th preset speed Unit: 0. the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 2nd preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 300 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 7th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 550 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen 11410 2054 / B SP2 R/W 11411 2054 / C SP3 R/W 11412 2054 / D SP4 R/W 11413 2054 / E SP5 R/W 11414 2054 / F SP6 R/W 11415 2054 / 10 SP7 R/W 11416 2054 / 11 SP8 R/W 11417 2054 / 12 SP9 R/W 11418 2054 / 13 SP10 R/W 11419 2054 / 14 SP11 R/W 38 . Check that PS8 has been assigned before assigning PS16.1 Hz Factory setting: 200 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 5th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 450 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 10 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 500 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 11 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 150 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 4th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 350 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 8th preset speed Unit: 0.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 11404 CANopen address 2054 / 5 Read/ Write PS16 R/WS Code Name/Description/Possible values 16 preset speeds Factory setting: 0 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.1 Hz Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 3rd preset speed Unit: 0. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 11420 CANopen address 2054 / 15 Read/ Write SP12 R/W Code Name/Description/Possible values 12 preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 600 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 13 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 700 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 14 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 800 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 15 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 900 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 16 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 1000 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Jog operation Factory setting: if tCC = 0 or 2: 0 if tCC = 1: 132 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Jog operation reference Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 + speed (motorized potentiometer) Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdt has been selected (see page 30). Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 - speed (motorized potentiometer) Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdt has been selected (see page 30). Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 th 11421 2054 / 16 SP13 R/W 11422 2054 / 17 SP14 R/W 11423 2054 / 18 SP15 R/W 11424 2054 / 19 SP16 R/W 11110 2051 / B JOG R/WS 11111 2051 / C JGF R/W 11501 2055 / 2 USP R/WS 11502 2055 / 3 dSP R/WS 39 Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 11503 CANopen address 2055 / 4 Code Str Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Save reference Factory setting: 0 Associated with the "+/- speed" function, this parameter can be used to save the reference: - When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM) - When the line supply or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM) On the next start-up, the speed reference is the last reference saved. 0 = "nO": No save 1 = "rAM": Save to RAM 2 = "EEP": Save to EEPROM PI regulator feedback Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 PI regulator proportional gain Unit: 0.01 Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 1 to 10000 Contributes to dynamic performance during rapid changes in the PI feedback. PI regulator integral gain Unit: 0.01 Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 1 to 10000 Contributes to static precision during slow changes in the PI feedback. PI feedback multiplication coefficient Unit: 0.1 Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 1 to 1000 For process adaptation Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": normal 1 = "YES": reverse 2 preset PI references Factory setting: 0 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen 11901 2059 / 2 PIF R/WS 11941 2059 / 2A rPG R/W 11942 2059 / 2B rIG R/W 11903 2059 / 4 FbS R/W 11940 2059 / 29 PIC R/W 11909 2059 / A Pr2 R/WS 40 Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 11910 CANopen address 2059 / B Code Pr4 Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values 4 preset PI references Factory setting: 0 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that Pr2 has been assigned before assigning Pr4. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 2nd preset PI reference Unit: 0.1% Factory setting: 300 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 Only active if Pr2 has been enabled by selecting an input. 3rd preset PI reference Unit: 0.1% Factory setting: 600 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 Only active if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input. 4th preset PI reference Unit: 0.1% Factory setting: 900 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 Only active if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input. Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) Unit: 0.1 Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 If the "PI" and "Low speed operating time"(tLS) (see page 24) functions are configured at the same time, the PI regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP. This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting, operating at low speed then stopping, and so on… Parameter rSL (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PI error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP. The function is inactive if tLS = 0. Internal PI regulator reference Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": The PI regulator reference is Fr1, except for UPdH and UPdt (+/- speed cannot be used as the PI regulator reference). 1 = "YES": The PI regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI. Internal PI regulator reference Unit: 0.1% Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 11921 2059 / 16 rP2 R/W 11922 2059 / 17 rP3 R/W 11923 2059 / 18 rP4 R/W 11960 2059 / 3D rSL RW0 11908 2059 / 9 PII R/WS 11920 2059 / 15 rPI R/W 41 Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 10001 CANopen address 2046 / 2 Code bLC Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Brake control configuration Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). 0 = "nO": Not assigned 2 = "r2": Relay R2 64 = "dO": Logic output AOC If bLC is assigned, parameters FLr (page 46) and brA (page 34) are forced to nO, and parameter OPL (page 47) is forced to YES. bLC is forced to nO if OPL = OAC (page 46). Brake release frequency Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0 to 100 Motor current threshold for brake release Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0 to 1.36 In (1) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Brake release time Unit: 0.01 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 0 to 500 Brake engage frequency threshold Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 65535 Adjustment range: 0 to LSP 65535 = "nO": Not set 0 to LSP: Adjustment range in Hz If bLC is assigned and bEn still equals nO, the drive will lock on a bLF fault on the first run command. Brake engage time Unit: 0.01 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 0 to 500 Brake release pulse Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction corresponds to the direction of rotation commanded. 1 = "YES": Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction is always forward, regardless of the direction of operation commanded. Check that the motor torque direction for "Forward" control corresponds to the upward direction of the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases. 10002 2046 / 3 brL R/WS 10006 2046 / 7 Ibr R/WS 10004 2046 / 5 brt R/WS 10003 2046 / 4 bEn R/WS 10005 2046 / 6 bEt R/WS 10007 2046 / 8 bIP R/WS 42 . motor 2 Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30).5 In (1) Adjustment range: 0. Switching. An external means of motor thermal protection must therefore be provided. Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.The motor switching function disables motor thermal protection. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. 9701 2043 / 2 UnS2 R/WS Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 1 V Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: According to drive rating: ATV31ppp M2: 100 to 240 V ATV31ppp M3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31ppp N4: 100 to 500 V ATV31ppp S6X: 100 to 600 V 43 . the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen CL1 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0 (page 24).1 A Factory setting: 1. CL2 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1 (page 43). do not use the tUn auto-tuning function (page 26) on motor 2 and do not configure tUn = rUn or POn. the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen 9203 203E / 4 CL2 R/W 8011 2032 / C CHP R/WS LI or bit = 0: Motor 1 LI or bit = 1: Motor 2 .Changes to parameters are only taken into account when the drive is locked. 2nd current limit Unit: 0. .Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 9202 CANopen address 203E / 3 Code LC2 Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Switching for second current limit Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30).25 to 1.5 In (1) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.If you use this function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. Modifying UFt2 will cause UFr2 to return to the factory setting (20%).1 Hz Factory setting: if bFr = 50: 500 if bFr = 60: 600 Adjustment range: 100 to 5000 The ratio UnS (in volts) must not exceed the following values: FrS (in Hz) 9703 2043 / 4 nCr2 R/WS 9704 2043 / 5 nSP2 R/WS ATV31ppp M2: 7 max. for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load). rather than the nominal speed. Frequency loop gain. calculate the nominal speed as follows: Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x 100 . Check that the value of UFr2 is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability).25 to 1. Too high a gain may result in operating instability.5 In (1) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.slip in Hz 50 60 . ATV31ppp M3X: 7 max. motor 2 Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 For UFt2 = n or nLd: IR compensation. IR compensation/Voltage boost. motor 2 Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 Parameter active only if UFt2 = n or nLd.slip as a % 100 50 . ATV31ppp S6X: 17 max. Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 1 rpm Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0 to 32767 If.01 Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 50 to 100 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2 Factory setting: 2 0 = "L": Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors 1 = "P": Variable torque for pump and fan applications 2 = "n": Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications 3 = "nLd": Energy saving.1 A Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0. The FLG2 parameter adjusts the drive’s ability to follow the speed ramp based on the inertia of the machine being driven. 44 . the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %. Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 0. ATV31ppp N4: 14 max. Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase UFr2 if the torque is insufficient).slip in Hz 60 (50 Hz motors) (60 Hz motors) 9706 2043 / 7 COS2 R/WS 9707 2043 / 8 UFt2 R/W 9723 2043 / 18 UFr2 R/W 9720 2043 / 15 FLG2 R/W Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 0.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 9702 CANopen address 2043 / 3 Code FrS2 Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 0. For UFt2 = L or P: Voltage boost. motor 2 Unit: 1% Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 150 Parameter active only if UFt2 = n or nLd. The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact. Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed. according to the dynamics of the machine. 0 = "rMP": On ramp 1 = "FSt": Fast stop 2 = "nSt": Freewheel stop 9725 2043 / 1A SLP2 R/W 11601 2056 / 2 LAF R/WS 11602 2056 / 3 LAr R/WS 11603 2056 / 4 LAS R/WS 45 . Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Type of limit switch stop Factory setting: 2 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). motor 2 Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 Parameter active only if UFt2 = n or nLd. Slip compensation. reverse direction Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Limit. If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state. Limit.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 9721 CANopen address 2043 / 16 Code StA2 Read/ Write R/W Name/Description/Possible values Frequency loop stability. forward direction Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration). Max. if the fault has disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart.Freewheel stop The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 7122 CANopen address 2029 / 17 Code Atr Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Automatic restart Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Automatic restart.Motor overload (OLF) . the procedure is aborted and the drive remains locked until it is powered down then powered up. The speed reference and the operating direction must be maintained. 7123 2029 / 18 tAr R/WS 7124 2029 / 19 rSF R/WS 3110 2001 / B FLr R/WS 46 . resulting in a slight delay (1 second max). then 1 min for the following periods. It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent fault. Check that an automatic restart does not present any danger to personnel or equipment.Drive overheating (OHF) The drive safety relay remains activated if this function is active.Loss of a line phase (PHF) . The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s. This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO. after locking on a fault.Line overvoltage (OSF) . If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed. then follows the ramp to the reference speed.Reset of current fault or automatic restart .DC bus overvoltage (ObF) .Loss of 4-20 mA reference (LFF) . duration of restart process Factory setting: 0 0 = "5" : 5 minutes 1 = "10" : 10 minutes 2 = "30" : 30 minutes 3 = "1h": 1 hour 4 = "2h": 2 hours 5 = "3h": 3 hours 6 = "Ct": Unlimited This parameter is active if Atr = YES.CANopen fault (COF) .Loss of line supply or disconnection .Loss of a motor phase (OPF) . 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Function active When the function is operational. 5 s. The following faults permit this function: .Serial link (SLF) . Reset of current fault Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) Factory setting: 0 Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events: . FLr is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 42).External fault (EPF) . Use 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO (page 28). 10 s. it activates on each restart following one of the above events. 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault OHF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault OLF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault SLF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault COF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop 7006 2028 / 7 EPL R/WS 9611 2042 / C OPL R/WS 7002 2028 / 3 IPL R/WS 7008 2028 / 9 OHL R/WS 7009 2028 / A OLL R/WS 7010 2028 / B SLL R/WS 7011 2028 / C COL R/WS 47 . Configuration of line phase loss fault Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31ppp M2: 0 This parameter is only active on 3-phase drives. the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop Configuration of motor phase loss fault Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Triggering of OPF fault 2 = "OAC": No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and flying restart even if FLr = nO.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 7131 CANopen address 2029 / 20 Code EtF Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values External fault Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. If OPL = OAC. bLC is forced to nO (page 42). OPL is forced to YES if brake control bLC is assigned (page 42). To be used with downstream contactor. see page 28) 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 4 = "LFF": The drive switches to the fallback speed (LFF parameter) 5 ="rLS": The drive maintains the speed at which it was travelling when the fault occurred until the fault has disappeared. Otherwise. check the connection of input AI3.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 7012 CANopen address 2028 / D Code tnL Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Configuration of auto-tuning fault tnF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored (the drive reverts to the factory settings) 1 = "YES": Fault with drive locked. Before setting LFL to YES. Controlled stop on mains power break Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Locking of the drive and freewheel stopping of the motor 1 = "MMS": This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as possible. the stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive. If rSC (see page 26) is other than nO. Operating time reset to zero Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": No 2 = "rtH": Operating time reset to zero The rPr parameter automatically falls back to nO as soon as the reset to zero is performed. This would invalidate the guarantee. rMP or FSt.1 Hz Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Fallback speed setting for stopping in the event of a fault Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": The line voltage monitoring threshold is: ATV31ppp M2: 130 V ATV31ppp M3X: 130 V ATV31ppp N4: 270 V ATV31ppp S6X: 340 V In this case. All active faults are reset on a rising edge (from 0 to 1) of the input. 2 = "rMP": Stop according to the valid ramp (dEC or dE2) 3 = "FSt": Fast stop. It is inactive when the input is at state 1. 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop The factory setting of LFL is forced to YES if CrH3 < CrL3 (see page 28) and nO is impossible. Fallback speed Unit: 0. the drive may immediately switch to an LFF fault. Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 . a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be guaranteed. 7003 2028 / 4 LFL R/WS 7080 2028 / 51 LFF R/WS 7007 2028 / 8 drn R/WS 7004 2028 / 5 StP R/WS 7125 2029 / 1A InH R/WS 3120 2001 / 15 rPr R/WS 48 . Fault inhibit Factory setting: 0 Inhibiting faults may damage the drive beyond repair. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Fault monitoring is active when the input is at state 0. tnL is forced to YES.20 mA signal fault LFF Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Fault ignored (only value possible if CrL3 y 3 mA. 1 stop bit 5 = "8n2": 8 data bits. logic inputs LI 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2. Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local mode Active only if LAC = 3 Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31ppp A: 16 In forced local mode. logic inputs LI 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (type A drives only). etc.0": 125 kbps 60 = "250. 2 stop bits Modbus: Time-out Unit: 0. summing inputs.0": 250 kbps 68 = "500. only the speed reference is taken into account. are not active.) 4 = "8n1": 8 data bits. no parity. RUN. RUN. 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1.2": 19200 bps (Caution: The remote display terminal can only be used with this value.6" : 9600 bps 32 = "19. the terminal block or display terminal regains control of the drive.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 6001 CANopen address 201E / 2 Code Add Read/ Write R/WS Name/Description/Possible values Modbus: Drive address Unit: 1 Factory setting: 1 Adjustment range: 1 to 247 Modbus: Drive address Unit: 1 Factory setting: 1 Adjustment range: 1 to 247 Modbus: Transmission speed Factory setting: 32 24 = "4.8" : 4800 bps 28 = "9. 1 stop bit (Caution: The remote display terminal can only be used with this value. no parity.1 s Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 CANopen: Drive address Unit: 1 Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 127 CANopen: Transmission speed Factory setting: 52 30 = "10. STOP buttons 163 = "LCC": Remote display terminal: LFr reference page 14. FWD/REV buttons.) Modbus: communication format Factory setting: 3 2 = "8O1": 8 data bits. PI functions. even parity.0": 10 kbps 34 = "20. STOP. logic inputs LI 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3.0": 500 kbps 76 = "1000": 1000 kbps Forced local mode Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 In forced local mode. 1 stop bit 3 = "8E1": 8 data bits. 6001 201E / 2 Add R/WS 6003 201E / 4 tbr R/WS 6004 201E / 5 tFO R/WS 6005 201E / 6 ttO R/WS 6051 201E / 34 AdCO R/WS 6053 201E / 36 bdCO R/WS 8431 2036 / 20 FLO R/WS 8432 2036 / 21 FLOC R/WS 49 .0": 50 kbps 52 = "125.0": 20 kbps 38 = "50. odd parity. . . When access is locked using a code.To reactivate locking with the same code when the parameters have been unlocked.To lock access with a new code when the parameters have been unlocked. Caution: Before entering a code. enter a code (2 to 9999).To unlock access.To disable locking when the parameters have been unlocked. with only a temporary choice of parameter displayed. do not forget to make a careful note of it. The code remains on the display and access is unlocked until the next power down. return to "OFF". 50 . . "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. only the monitoring parameters can be accessed. . 1 = On: A code is locking access (2 to 9999) . enter the code. 0 = OFF: No access locking codes . 2 to 9999: Parameter access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen). Parameter access will be locked again on the next power-up.Configuration and adjustment variables Modbus address 3003 CANopen address 2000 / 4 Code COd Read/ Write R/W Name/Description/Possible values Display terminal locking code Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code. return to "On". enter the new code.If an incorrect code is entered. COd changes to "On" and the parameters remain locked.To lock access. 51 . • To replace an ATV28. • For any new installation. it is easy to replace an ATV28 with a ATV31 in an installation communicating via Modbus.Replacing an ATV28 with an ATV31 If necessary. but only these . ATV 28 address 2 4 5 6 10 40 51 52 53 55 60 61 64 65 110 151 152 155 190 250 251 252 253 258 260 261 262 264 265 New address 3003 4434 4444 11101 6001 3015 3102 3103 9602 9601 3107 9607 9003 9011 5002 9611 7002 3110 7007 3104 3105 9001 9002 9622 9012 9013 11111 11410 11411 Code COd CrL3 CrH3 tCC Add bFr SFr tFr FrS UnS nrd UFt brA Frt r2 OPL IPL FLr drn HSP LSP ACC dEC ItH AC2 dE2 JGF SP2 SP3 ATV 28 address 266 267 268 269 270 272 279 280 281 282 283 284 286 287 340 400 401 402 440 450 451 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 New address 11412 11413 11414 11415 11210 11701 11941 11942 11903 11001 11002 11003 11301 11940 64001 8501 8502 8504 11920 3203 3202 3204 3207 9630 3209 7121 3201 3206 Code SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 IdC tLS rPG rIG FbS Ctd ttd Ftd JPF PIC rOt CMD LFR CMI rPI FrH rFr LCr ULn tHr tHd LFt ETA ETI ETI2 (1) ATV 28 address 462 464 466 468 478 482 487 491 530 555 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 991 New address 7201 7202 7203 7204 5240 5261 3208 3211 3231 3017 8606 8601 8603 8602 8605 8604 8607 8608 8609 8610 8611 8612 8613 8614 8615 8616 64003 Code DP1 DP2 DP3 DP4 IOLR AO1R Otr OPr rtH INV ERRD CMDD ETAD LFRD FRHD RFRD SMIL SMIL SMAL SMAL SPAL SPAL SPAT SPDL SPDL SPDT LCC (1)See the ATV28 communication variables manual. All the other ATV28 addresses must be replaced with those for the ATV31. as this enables the number of Modbus requests to be reduced. most of the variables used in the ATV28 are found in the ATV31 with the same addresses (double addressing). the ATV28 addresses in this table can be used. we recommend using the new addresses. In fact. 1 Past fault No. 3 Past fault No. 4 Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage . 2 52 . motor 2 2nd current limit Current limit Control word DRIVECOM control word Extended control word Image of Modbus extended control word Image of CANopen extended control word Display terminal locking code Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault COF Copy channel 1 to channel 2 Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating plate Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3 Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3 Motor current threshold Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp time for fast stopping DC injection via logic input 2nd deceleration ramp time Deceleration ramp time Analog/logic output AOC/AOV Past fault No. 2 Past fault No.Code index Code AC2 ACC AdC AdCO Add AI1C AI2C AI3C AIPC AO1R AO1t Atr bdCO bEn bEt bFr bIP bLC brA brL brt CCS Cd1 Cd2 CHCF CHP CL2 CLI CMD CMDD CMI CMI1 CMI2 COd COL COP COS COS2 CrH3 CrL3 Ctd dCF dCI dE2 dEC dO DP1 DP2 DP3 DP4 drn dSP EP1 EP2 Modbus address CANopen address 9012 203C / D 2nd acceleration ramp time 9001 203C / 2 Acceleration ramp time 10401 6051 6001 5242 5243 5244 5241 5261 4601 7122 6053 10003 10005 3015 10007 10001 9003 10002 10004 8421 8423 8424 8401 8011 9203 9201 8501 8601 8504 8541 8542 3003 7011 8402 9606 9706 4444 4434 11001 11230 11203 9013 9002 5031 7201 7202 7203 7204 7007 11502 7211 7212 204A / 2 201E / 34 201E / 2 2016 / 2B 2016 / 2C 2016 / 2D 2016 / 2A 2016 / 3E 2010 / 2 2029 / 17 201E / 36 2046 / 4 2046 / 6 2000 / 10 2046 / 8 2046 / 2 203C / 4 2046 / 3 2046 / 5 2036 / 16 2036 / 18 2036 / 19 2036 / 2 2032 / C 203E / 4 203E / 2 2037 / 2 6040 2037 / 5 2037 / 2A 2037 / 2B 2000 / 4 2028 / C 2036 / 3 2042 / 7 2043 / 7 200E / 2D 200E / 23 2050 / 2 2052 / 1F 2052 / 4 203C / E 203C / 3 2014 / 20 202A / 2 202A / 3 202A / 4 202A / 5 2028 / 8 2055 / 3 202A / C 202A / D Name Page 34 33 35 49 49 18 18 18 18 18 28 46 49 42 42 25 42 42 34 42 42 32 31 31 31 43 43 24 14 11 15 20 21 50 47 32 26 44 28 28 24 35 35 34 33 29 19 19 19 19 48 39 20 20 Automatic standstill DC injection CANopen: Drive address Modbus: Drive address Value of analog input AI1 Value of analog input AI2 Value of analog input AI3 Value of analog input AIP (ATV31….speed (motorized potentiometer) Status of past fault No. 1 Status of past fault No.A drive potentiometer) Value of the analog output Configuration of the analog output Automatic restart CANopen: Transmission speed Brake engage frequency threshold Brake engage time Standard motor frequency Brake release pulse Brake control configuration Deceleration ramp adaptation Brake release frequency Brake release time Control channel switching Configuration of control channel 1 Configuration of control channel 2 Mixed mode (control channels separated from reference channels) Switching. 1 Page 20 20 47 20 12 16 11 47 17 40 28 23 44 49 49 46 30 30 16 12 25 44 34 34 24 23 42 35 48 22 18 47 23 24 39 39 23 30 45 45 45 43 32 16 21 21 48 48 14 21 21 11 19 17 2002 / 4 6043 2042 / 3 2043 / 3 203C / C 2052 / 5 2050 / 4 2001 / 5 2046 / 7 2052 / B 2029 2000 2016 2028 2042 2053 2051 / 1A / 12 / 29 /3 / 17 /3 /C 2051 / B 2053 / 2 2000 / 7 2056 / 2 2056 / 3 2056 / 4 203E / 3 2262 / 4 2002 / 8 2038 / 20 2038 / 21 2028 / 51 2028 2037 2037 2037 6042 2029 2002 /4 /3 / 16 / 17 / 16 / 33 53 . forward direction Limit. thermal current 2nd skip frequency Jog operation reference Jog operation Skip frequency Function access level Limit. reverse direction Type of limit switch stop Switching for second current limit Control via remote display terminal Current in the motor Image of Modbus speed reference Image of CANopen speed reference Fallback speed Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 .20 mA signal fault LFF Frequency reference via the bus (signed value) Image of Modbus frequency reference Image of CANopen frequency reference Speed reference via the bus (signed value) Last fault Extended status word No.Code index Code EP3 EP4 EPL ErCO ERRD ETA ETAD EtF ETI FbS FCS FLG FLG2 FLO FLOC FLr Fr1 Fr2 FrH FRHD FrS FrS2 Frt FSt Ftd HSP Ibr IdC InH INV IOLR IPL ItH JF2 JGF JOG JPF LAC LAF LAr LAS LC2 LCC LCr LFD1 LFD2 LFF LFL LFr LFR1 LFR2 LFRD LFt LRS1 Modbus address 7213 7214 7006 6056 8606 3201 8603 7131 3206 11903 8002 9620 9720 8431 8432 3110 8413 8414 3203 8605 9602 9702 9011 11204 11003 3104 10006 11210 7125 3017 5240 7002 9622 11302 11111 11110 11301 3006 11601 11602 11603 9202 64003 3204 8631 8632 7080 7003 8502 8521 8522 8602 7121 3250 CANopen address Name 202A / E Status of past fault No.max. motor 2 Forced local mode Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local mode Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) Configuration reference 1 Configuration reference 2 Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value) Speed reference (signed ramp input) Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on the rating plate Ramp switching threshold Fast stop via logic input Motor frequency threshold High speed Motor current threshold for brake release Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode Fault inhibit Nominal drive current Value of logic I/O Configuration of line phase loss fault Motor thermal protection . 3 202A / F Status of past fault No. 4 2028 / 7 Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF 201E / 39 CANopen: error word 603F Fault code 2002 / 2 Status word 6041 DRIVECOM status word 2029 2002 2059 2032 2042 2043 2036 2036 2001 2036 2036 / 20 /7 /4 /3 / 15 / 15 / 20 / 21 /B /E /F External fault Extended status word PI feedback multiplication coefficient Return to factory settings/Restore configuration Frequency loop gain Frequency loop gain. 3 2001 / 6 Low speed 2042 / 4 Nominal motor current given on the rating plate 2043 / 4 Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the rating plate 2000 / C Drive rating 2001 / 8 Random switching frequency 2042 / 5 Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate 2043 2052 2028 2028 2042 2002 2002 2059 2059 2059 2037 2037 2037 2059 2059 2054 2054 2054 2054 2262 2014 2014 2036 /5 /3 /9 /A /C /C /6 / 29 /2 /9 / 20 / 21 /4 /A /B /5 /2 /3 /4 /3 /2 /3 /C Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the rating plate Freewheel stop via logic input Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault OHF Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault OLF Configuration of motor phase loss fault Motor power Motor torque Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator PI regulator feedback Internal PI regulator reference Image of Modbus PI reference Image of CANopen PI reference PI regulator reference via the bus 2 preset PI references 4 preset PI references 16 preset speeds 2 preset speeds 4 preset speeds 8 preset speeds Stop priority Relay r1 Relay r2 Reference switching Output frequency applied to the motor (signed value) Output speed (signed value) PI regulator integral gain Direction of operation authorized 2nd preset PI reference 3rd preset PI reference 4th preset PI reference PI regulator proportional gain Internal PI regulator reference Operating time reset to zero Ramp switching Type of ramp Reverse operation via logic input Cold state stator resistance Reset of current fault Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) Operating time Summing input 2 Summing input 3 Saving the configuration Level of automatic standstill DC injection current 2nd level of standstill DC injection current USPL/USPH scale factor Switching frequency Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault SLF Page 18 23 25 44 22 27 26 44 35 47 47 47 16 16 40 40 41 21 21 14 40 41 38 37 37 37 32 29 29 31 16 12 40 33 41 41 41 40 41 48 33 33 28 26 46 41 16 36 36 27 36 36 25 27 47 2002 / 3 6044 2059 / 2B 2262 / 2 2059 / 16 2059 / 17 2059 / 18 2059 / 2A 2059 / 15 2001 / 15 203C / B 203C / 5 2051 / 6 2042 / 2C 2029 / 19 2059 / 3D 2002 / 20 2058 / 2 2058 / 3 2032 / 2 204A / 4 204A / 6 205A / 2 2001 / 3 2028 / B 54 .Code index Code LRS3 LSP nCr nCr2 NCV nrd nSP nSP2 nSt OHL OLL OPL OPr Otr PIC PIF PII PIR1 PIR2 PISP Pr2 Pr4 PS16 PS2 PS4 PS8 PSt r1 r2 rFC rFr RFRD rIG rOt rP2 rP3 rP4 rPG rPI rPr rPS rPt rrS rSC rSF rSL rtH SA2 SA3 SCS SdC1 SdC2 SdS SFr SLL Modbus address 3252 3105 9603 9703 3011 3107 9604 9704 11202 7008 7009 9611 3211 3205 11940 11901 11908 8531 8532 8503 11909 11910 11404 11401 11402 11403 64002 5001 5002 8411 3202 8604 11942 64001 11921 11922 11923 11941 11920 3120 9010 9004 11105 9643 7124 11960 3231 11801 11802 8001 10403 10405 12001 3102 7010 CANopen address Name 2002 / 35 Extended status word No. speed 6046 / 1 Min. motor 2 Controlled stop on mains power break Save reference Normal stop mode Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded Max. duration of restart process Modbus: Transmission speed 2-wire/3-wire control Type of 2-wire control Total DC injection braking time selected as normal stop mode Automatic standstill DC injection time 2nd automatic standstill DC injection time Max.Time delta Deceleration . motor 2 55 .Speed delta Acceleration .8608 11418 11419 11420 11421 11422 11423 11424 11410 11411 11412 11413 11414 11415 11416 11417 8611 .Time delta Suppression of the speed loop filter Frequency loop stability Frequency loop stability. motor 2 6046 / 2 Max.8610 8607 .8615 8616 9101 9621 9721 7004 11503 11201 9005 9006 9007 9008 7123 6003 11101 11102 11211 10402 10404 3210 6004 3103 3209 9630 11701 7012 3401 11002 6005 9608 9609 3302 9623 9723 CANopen address 2042 / 1A Slip compensation 2043 / 1A Slip compensation.Code index Code SLP SLP2 SMAL SMIL SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SPAL SPAT SPDL SPDT SrF StA StA2 StP Str Stt tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 tAr tbr tCC tCt tdC tdC1 tdC2 TDM tFO tFr tHd tHr tLS tnL TSP ttd ttO tUn tUS UdP UFr UFr2 Modbus address 9625 9725 8609 . thermal state reached by the drive Modbus: communication format Maximum output frequency Drive thermal state Motor thermal state Low speed operating time Configuration of auto-tuning fault tnF Drive firmware type Motor thermal state threshold Modbus: Time-out Motor control auto-tuning Auto-tuning status Drive firmware version IR compensation/Voltage boost IR compensation/Voltage boost.8612 8613 8614 .Speed delta Deceleration . speed 2054 / 13 10th preset speed 2054 / 14 11th preset speed 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 / 15 / 16 / 17 / 18 / 19 /B /C /D /E /F / 10 / 11 12th preset speed 13th preset speed 14th preset speed 15th preset speed 16th preset speed 2nd preset speed 3rd preset speed 4th preset speed 5th preset speed 6th preset speed 7th preset speed 8th preset speed Name Page 23 45 12 12 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 12 12 13 13 27 23 45 48 40 34 33 33 33 33 46 49 28 28 35 36 36 16 49 27 16 16 24 48 22 24 49 26 27 22 23 44 2054 / 12 6048 / 1 6048 / 2 6049 / 1 6049 / 2 203D / 2 2042 / 16 2043 / 16 2028 / 5 2055 / 4 2052 / 2 203C / 6 203C / 7 203C / 8 203C / 9 2029 / 18 201E / 4 2051 / 2 2051 / 3 2052 / C 204A / 3 204A / 5 2002 / B 201E / 5 2001 / 4 2002 / A 2042 / 1F 2057 / 2 2028 / D 2004 / 2 2050 / 3 201E / 6 2042 / 9 2042 / A 2000 / 4 2042 / 18 2043 / 18 9th preset speed Acceleration . High order Motor speed in customer units .Low order Drive voltage Drive type Page 27 44 16 25 43 39 17 17 22 22 56 .Code index Code UFt UFt2 ULn UnS UnS2 USP USPH USPL VCAL ZON Modbus address CANopen address Name 9607 2042 / 8 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio 9707 2043 / 8 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2 3207 9601 9701 11501 12003 12002 3012 3010 2002 / 5 2042 / 2 2043 / 2 2055 / 2 205A / 4 205A / 3 2000 / D 2000 / B Line voltage Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the rating plate + speed (motorized potentiometer) Motor speed in customer units . VVDED303092 EN atv31_communication variables_EN_V1 2003-11 . Altivar 31 Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Programming manual . Causes .___________________________________________________________________________________ 63 Display menu SUP.Contents Warnings____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 2 Steps for setting up the starter ___________________________________________________________________________________ 3 Factory configuration __________________________________________________________________________________________ 4 Basic functions _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 5 Setup ._______________________________________________________________________________________________ 23 Control menu CtL. 1 .Remedies ____________________________________________________________________________________ 68 Configuration/Settings table ____________________________________________________________________________________ 70 Index of parameter codes ______________________________________________________________________________________ 74 Index of functions ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 75 NOTE: Please also refer to the "Installation Guide".Preliminary recommendations _____________________________________________________________________________ 7 Functions of the display and the keys______________________________________________________________________________ 8 Remote terminal option________________________________________________________________________________________ 10 Programming _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 11 Function compatibility _________________________________________________________________________________________ 13 List of functions which can be assigned to inputs/outputs _____________________________________________________________ 14 Settings menu SEt-___________________________________________________________________________________________ 16 Motor control menu drC-_______________________________________________________________________________________ 20 I/O menu I-O.__________________________________________________________________________________________ 64 Maintenance ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 67 Faults ._____________________________________________________________________________________________ 60 Communication menu COM.___________________________________________________________________________________________ 26 Application functions menu FUn.________________________________________________________________________________ 37 Fault menu FLt. can shut down the drive and consequently the motor. the drive power supply must be disconnected before any operation on either the electrical or mechanical parts of the installation or machine. Their description can in no way be considered contractual. This is the time required for the capacitors to discharge. It is the responsibility of the end user to ensure that the machine meets these standards. either from a technical point of view or in the way they are operated. It is extremely dangerous to touch them. can also cause shutdowns. The motor can be stopped during operation by inhibiting start commands or the speed reference while the drive remains powered up. In this case the user must take precautions against the possibility of restarts. The specifications contained in this document must be applied in order to comply with the essential requirements of the EMC directive.Warnings When the drive is powered up. 2 . Finally. If personnel safety requires prevention of sudden restarts. in particular by using a low speed detector to cut off power to the drive if the motor performs an unprogrammed shutdown. this electronic locking system is not sufficient: fit a cut-off on the power circuit. The Altivar 31 must be considered as a component: it is neither a machine nor a device ready for use in accordance with European directives (machinery directive and electromagnetic compatibility directive). After the ALTIVAR has been switched off and the display has disappeared completely. The motor itself may be stopped by a mechanical blockage. If the cause of the shutdown disappears. overspeed checks and checks to ensure that the trajectory remains under constant control must be made by separate devices which are independent of the drive. The drive must not be used as a safety device for machines posing a potential risk of material damage or personal injury (lifting equipment. The products and equipment described in this document may be changed or modified at any time. voltage variations. especially those which must conform to safety regulations. The drive must be installed and set up in accordance with both international and national standards. In such applications. Bringing the device into conformity is the responsibility of the systems integrator who must observe the EMC directive among others within the European Union. the power components and some of the control components are connected to the line supply. In general. in the event of a fault. for example). The drive is fitted with safety devices which. wait for 10 minutes before working on the equipment. there is a risk of restarting which may endanger certain machines or installations. The drive cover must be kept closed. especially line supply failures. Check that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range of the drive (see the ATV 31Installation Manual).The ACC (Acceleration) and dEC (Deceleration) parameters . .menus: The application functions (only if the factory configuration of the drive is not suitable).The LSP (Low speed when the reference is zero) and HSP (High speed when the reference is maximum) parameters . • Remove the Altivar 31 from its packaging and check that it has not been damaged in transit.Configure the following in the I-O-. see page 22. if it is different from 50 Hz. 2 . • It is always possible to return to the factory settings using the FCS parameter in the drC-. • Auto-tuning. Auto-tuning measures the stator resistance of the motor in order to optimize the control algorithms. ensuring that its coupling corresponds to the line voltage • The control via the logic inputs • The speed reference via the logic or analog inputs 5 .and FUn. 36 or 59).Configure the following: The nominal frequency (bFr) of the motor. 7 .menu: The motor parameters. 3 . but do not give a run command 6 .compatible with the voltage range of the drive .Configure the following in the drC. or 2-wire level detection.menu: .Connect the following to the drive: • The line supply.and FUn. The user must ensure that the programmed functions are compatible with the wiring diagram used. ensuring that it is: .The ItH parameter (Motor thermal protection) 10 .Switch on the drive. can be applied to optimize performance in terms of accuracy and response time. in particular when the factory configuration has to be changed.Delivery of the drive • Check that the drive reference printed on the label is the same as that on the delivery note corresponding to the purchase order. only if the factory configuration of the drive is not suitable. I-O-.Set the following in the SEt. or local control for ATV31pppA. 3 .menu.Start the drive Practical recommendations • Preparations can be made for programming the drive by filling in the configuration and settings tables (see page 70). for example the control mode: 3-wire.Fit the drive 4 . which is performed using the drC. 25. 9 .The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible.switched off • The motor. or 2-wire transition detection. or 2-wire level detection with forward direction priority.Steps for setting up the starter 1 . 8 .menus (set InI to activate the function. CtL. CtL. the drive can be used without changing the settings. for 0. speed 2 = 10 Hz. If the above values are compatible with the application. and motor frequency with motor running • Motor frequency (bFr): 50 Hz • Constant torque application with sensorless flux vector control (UFt = n) • Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp (Stt = rMP). LI1 = forward.LI6: Inactive (not assigned) • Analog inputs: . speed 4 = 20 Hz). STOP buttons and the drive potentiometer are active. LI2 (2 directions of operation): 2-wire transition detection control. Logic inputs LI1 and LI2 and analog input AI1 are inactive (not assigned).7 x nominal drive current. LI4: 4 preset speeds (speed 1 = speed reference or LSP. LI2 = reverse. . inactive on ATV 31ppppppA (not assigned) . ATV 31ppppppA drives are supplied with local control activated: the RUN. 4 .LI1.5 seconds • Automatic adaptation of the deceleration ramp in the event of overvoltage on braking • No automatic restarting after a fault • Switching frequency 4 kHz • Logic inputs: .AI3: 4-20 mA inactive (not assigned) • Relay R1: The contact opens in the event of a fault (or drive off) • Relay R2: Inactive (not assigned) • Analog output AOC: 0-20 mA inactive (not assigned) ATV 31ppppppA range When they leave the factory.AI2: Summed speed reference input 0±10 V . speed 3 = 15 Hz. • Stop mode in the event of a fault: Freewheel • Linear ramps (ACC.LI5 . inactive on ATV 31ppppppA drives (not assigned) .AI1: Speed reference 0-10 V.LI3.Factory configuration Factory settings The Altivar 31 is factory-set for the most common operating conditions: • Display: Drive ready (rdY) with motor stopped. dEC): 3 seconds • Low speed (LSP): 0 Hz • High speed (HSP): 50 Hz • Motor thermal current (ItH) = nominal motor current (value depending on drive rating) • Standstill injection braking current (SdC) = 0. 9 Motor current/Drive In Drive ventilation The fan starts up when the drive is powered up then shuts down after 10 seconds if a run command has not been received. Typical tripping points: .Motor current = 150% of nominal drive current: 60 seconds Time (seconds) 5000 3000 1000 200 160 100 60 2 0 1 1.1 1.8 1. The fan is powered automatically when the drive is unlocked (operating direction + reference).6 1. It is powered down a few seconds after the drive is locked (motor speed < 0.5 1.3 1.2 Hz and injection braking completed). Indirect protection of the drive against overloads by tripping in the event of an overcurrent.Basic functions Drive thermal protection Functions: Thermal protection by PTC probe fitted on the heatsink or integrated in the power module.Motor current = 185% of nominal drive current: 2 seconds .7 1.4 1.2 1. 5 . 5 1.4 1.8 0.3 1. Trip time t in seconds 10 000 1 Hz 3 Hz 5 Hz 10 Hz 20 Hz 50 Hz 1 000 100 0. The protection takes account of self-cooled motors.7 0.1 1.9 1 1.Basic functions Motor thermal protection Function: Thermal protection by calculating the I2t. Caution: The memory of the motor thermal state returns to zero when the drive is disconnected.6 Motor current/ItH 6 .2 1. these commands are taken into account without a reset being necessary. Otherwise.Display: Values displayed by the drive . If the automatic restart function is configured (parameter Atr in the FLt.Preliminary recommendations Prior to switching on and configuring the drive . Test on a low power motor or without a motor • In factory settings mode. Provide an alternative means of thermal protection on every motor. an input assigned to the run command may cause the motor to start immediately on exiting the configuration menus.menu on page 21) • Motor thermal protection is no longer provided by the drive. .menu. I-O-. the display and buttons can be used to modify the settings and to extend the functions described in the following pages. Using motors in parallel • Configure the voltage/frequency ratio: UFt = L (drC.menus (set InI to activate the function.and FUn. 25. CtL. If they have not been reset. There are three types of parameter: . It is very easy to return to the factory settings using the FCS parameter in the drC-.Check that changes to the current operating settings do not present any danger. To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of high power drives). "motor phase loss" detection is active (OPL = YES). User adjustment and extension of functions If necessary.Configuration: Can only be modified when stopped and no braking is taking place. . Start up Important: In factory settings mode on power-up.menu on page 21) • Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor current is less than 0. "reverse" and "DC injection stop" commands have been reset. otherwise the load resistor may be damaged. the drive will display "nSt" but will not start. see page 60). • Configure the voltage/frequency ratio: UFt = L (drC. see page 22.These instructions are vital for cycles < 60 s.Check that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range of the drive (see pages 3 and 4 of the ATV 31 Installation Manual).Setting: Can be changed during operation or when stopped . With power switching via line contactor .Ensure the logic inputs are switched off (state 0) to prevent accidental starting. the motor can only be powered once the "forward". 7 . 36 or 59). . Can be displayed during operation. The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible.2 times the nominal drive current. Use inputs LI1 to LI6 to control the drive. Changes should preferably be made with the drive stopped. deactivate "motor phase loss" detection (OPL = NO).Setup .Avoid operating the contactor frequently (premature ageing of the filter capacitors). or in a manual fault reset or after a stop command. FSt: Fast stop .rdY: Drive ready .init: Initialization sequence . or saves the displayed parameter or value • Pressing or does not store the selection. • Press and hold down (>2 s) To save and store the selection: ENT The display flashes when a value is stored.dcb: DC injection braking in progress .Functions of the display and the keys • Red LED "DC bus ON" • Four 7-segment displays Altivar 31 RUN CAN ERR • 2 CANopen status LEDs • Returns to the previous menu or parameter. In current limit mode.menu (default selection: motor frequency).0: Display of the parameter selected in the SUP. . or to scroll through the data quickly.nSt: Freewheel stop . or clears the displayed value to return to the previous stored value • Enters a menu or a parameter. or decreases the displayed value ESC ENT • Exits a menu or parameter.43. 8 . Normal display. the display flashes. or increases the displayed value • Goes to the next menu or parameter.tUn: Auto-tuning in progress The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault. with no fault present and no starting: . • Reference potentiometer. a freewheel stop takes place. with no fault present and no starting: . but if injection braking is in progress.menu) is not configured as LOC.rdY: Drive ready .If tCC (I-O.FSt: Fast stop . or saves the displayed parameter or value STOP/RESET button • Used to reset faults • Can be used to control motor stopping . or clears the displayed value to return to the previous stored value ESC ENT • Enters a menu or a parameter.menu is configured as LOC RUN STOP RESET • Pressing or does not store the selection.43. it is a freewheel stop.tUn: Auto-tuning in progress The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault.dcb: DC injection braking in progress . or decreases the displayed value Altivar 31 RUN CAN ERR • 2 CANopen status LEDs • Exits a menu or a parameter.Functions of the display and the keys ATV31ppppppA: • Red LED "DC bus ON" • Four 7-segment displays • Returns to the previous menu or parameter. active if the Fr1 parameter in the CtL. stopping is on a ramp.If tCC (I-O. 9 .nSt: Freewheel stop . Normal display. • Press and hold down (>2 s) To save and store the selection: ENT The display flashes when a value is stored. .menu is configured as AIP • RUN button: Controls motor switch-on in forward mode.menu) is configured as LOC. In current limit mode. or increases the displayed value • Goes to the next menu or parameter. .menu (default selection: output frequency applied to the motor). if parameter tCC in the I-O.init: Initialization sequence . or to scroll through the data quickly. the display flashes.0: Display of the parameter selected in the SUP. See the SCS and FCS parameters in the drC-. the keypad will remain locked. which is connected to the drive serial link (see the manual supplied with the terminal). It has a cable with connectors. and if DC injection standstill braking is configured. the tbr parameter in the COM. CtL.and SUP. • In order for the remote terminal to be active. It has the same display and the same programming buttons as the Altivar 31 with the addition of a switch to lock access to the menus and three buttons for controlling the drive: • FWD/REV: reversal of the direction of rotation • RUN: motor run command • STOP/RESET: Motor stop command or fault reset Pressing the button a first time stops the motor.menus) all menus can be accessed • position: Note: Customer password protection has priority on the switch.Remote terminal option This module is a local control unit which can be mounted on the door of the wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure. if the drive has been locked. These configurations can be saved. 4 different operations for the same device can also be stored on the terminal.menus. • The access locking switch on the remote terminal also prevents the drive settings being accessed via the keypad. transported and transferred from one drive to another of the same rating. pressing it a second time stops this braking.menu must remain in factory settings mode: 19. View of the front panel: View of the rear panel: 4-character display unit ESC ENT FWD REV Connector STOP RESET RUN Access locking switch: • positions: settings and display accessible (SEt. Saving and loading configurations Up to four complete configurations for ATV 31 drives can be stored on the remote terminal.2 (see page 73). 10 . • When the remote terminal is disconnected. I-O-.and FUn. ACC parameter.menu.Entering settings .Programming Access to menus Power-up XXX ESC ENT Displays the drive status bFr ENT Motor frequency (the factory setting is only visible the first time the drive is powered up) ESC SEtdrCI-OCtLFUnFLtCONSUP- ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC Settings Motor control I/O Control Functions Faults Communication Monitoring ESC ESC ESC Menus ESC ESC ESC ESC Some parameters can be accessed in a number of menus for increased user-friendliness: . 11 .Return to factory settings .Restoring and saving the configuration A dash appears after menu and sub-menu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes. Examples: FUn. Example: Value or assignment Parameter Menu SEt- ENT ACC dEC ENT 15 0 . you will return to the ENT Menu ESC 1st nth last If.menu. after modifying any of the parameters (nth). which means that after the last parameter. conversely.H Code bFr Description Adjustment range Factory setting Standard motor frequency 50 This parameter is only visible the first time the drive is switched on. you have accessed another menu or have restarted the system. 12 . 1st ENT Menu ESC nth last Configuration of the bFr parameter This parameter can only be modified in stop mode without a run command. It can be modified at any time in the drC. you will be taken directly to the nth parameter (see below). ESC ESC ESC 26 0 . Ftd page 19. you can switch from the first parameter to the last parameter by pressing . >. if you continue to press first parameter and. FrS page 20 and tFr page 22. you will always be taken to the first parameter in the menu (see above). 50 Hz: IEC 60 Hz: NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP page 16. If. .Programming Accessing menu parameters To save and store the selection: ENT The display flashes when a value is stored. 1 flash (save) ENT 26 0 . (Next parameter) All the menus are "drop-down" type menus. you quit a menu and return to this menu without having accessed another menu in the meantime. in the meantime. A single input can activate several functions at the same time (reverse and 2nd ramp for example). Function compatibility table The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one another. Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible. The SUP.speed (1) Management of limit switches Preset speeds PI regulator Jog operation Brake sequence DC injection stop Fast stop Freewheel stop p p X p X p p p A p p p p p p p A p A p p p X X p p X p p p A A (1) Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2 (see diagrams 28 and 30) p Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable Priority functions (functions which cannot be active simultaneously): function indicated by the arrow has priority over the X A The other. Reverse On the ATV31pppA range only. Flying restart This is only possible for 2-wire level detection control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO). Logic and analog input application functions Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs. This function is locked if automatic standstill injection is configured as DC (AdC = Ct). If there is an incompatibility between functions. Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references.Function compatibility Incompatible functions The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below: Automatic restart This is only possible for 2-wire level detection control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO). The user must therefore ensure that these functions are compatible. Freewheel stop Preset speeds Jog operation +/. this function is locked if local control is active (tCC = LOC). Management of limit switches DC injection stop Brake sequence Summing inputs Summing inputs +/.speed (1) PI regulator Fast stop 13 .display menu (parameters LIA and AIA on page 66) can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check their compatibility. Stop functions have priority over run commands. the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured. AI3 AI1 AIP (potentiometer) AI2 AI2 Analog/logic output Not assigned Motor current Motor frequency Motor torque Power supplied by the drive Drive fault (logic data) Drive running (logic data) Frequency threshold reached (logic data) High speed (HSP) reached (logic data) Current threshold reached (logic data) Frequency reference reached (logic data) Motor thermal threshold reached (logic data) Brake sequence (logic data) Page 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 54 Code OCr rFr OLO OPr FLt rUn FtA FLA CtA SrA tSA bLC Factory setting AOC/AOV 14 .LI6 LI1 .List of functions which can be assigned to inputs/outputs Logic inputs Not assigned Forward 2 preset speeds 4 preset speeds 8 preset speeds 16 preset speeds 2 preset PI references 4 preset PI references + speed .speed Jog operation Ramp switching Switching for 2nd current limit Fast stop via logic input DC injection via logic input Freewheel stop via logic input Reverse External fault RESET (fault reset) Forced local mode Reference switching Control channel switching Motor switching Limiting of forward motion (limit switch) Limiting of reverse motion (limit switch) Fault inhibit Page 44 44 44 45 51 51 48 48 46 38 55 39 39 40 23 61 60 63 34 35 56 58 58 62 Code PS2 PS4 PS8 PS16 Pr2 Pr4 USP dSP JOG rPS LC2 FSt dCI nSt rrS EtF rSF FLO rFC CCS CHP LAF LAr InH Factory setting ATV31pppA ATV31ppp LI5 .LI2 LI5 .LI6 LI1 LI3 LI3 LI4 LI4 LI2 Analog inputs Not assigned Reference 1 Reference 2 Summing input 2 Summing input 3 PI regulator feedback Page 33 33 42 42 51 Code Fr1 Fr2 SA2 SA3 PIF Factory setting ATV31pppA ATV31ppp AI3 AI1 . List of functions which can be assigned to inputs/outputs Relay Not assigned Drive fault Drive running Frequency threshold reached High speed (HSP) reached Current threshold reached Frequency reference reached Motor thermal threshold reached Brake sequence Page 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 54 Code FLt rUn FtA FLA CtA SrA tSA bLC Factory setting R2 R1 15 . on the pages indicated.menu) and 0.1 to 999. SEtCode LFr Adjustment Factory setting range Speed reference via the remote terminal 0 to HSP This parameter appears if LCC = YES (page 35) or if Fr1/Fr2 = LCC (page 33). reference) High speed LSP to tFr bFr (Motor frequency to max. Check that the value of dEC is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped.5 In (1) According to drive rating Set ItH to the nominal current on the motor rating plate. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu.2 to 1. 16 . Motor thermal protection .9 s 5s 2nd deceleration ramp time See page 38 0. 2nd acceleration ramp time See page 38 0. When the corresponding function is also accessible and adjustable from within the configuration menu.9 s 3s Defined as the acceleration time between 0 and the nominal frequency FrS (parameter in the drC.9 s 5s Deceleration ramp time 0. and if the remote terminal is online. reference): Check that this setting is suitable for the motor and the application. thermal current 0. Check that it is safe to make changes during operation.1 to 999. Internal PI regulator reference See page 51 0. In this case.Settings menu SEt- SEt- ENT LFr rPI ACC ENT Speed reference via the terminal ESC ESC ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ESC ESC SdS ENT Spd parameter scale factor ESC The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped. These parameter appear regardless of how the other menus have been configured.max. LFr is reset to 0 when the drive is powered down.menu).9 s 3s Defined as the deceleration time between the nominal frequency FrS (parameter in the drC. LFr can also be accessed via the drive keypad.0 to 100% 0 Acceleration ramp time 0. to aid programming their description is detailed in these menus. Changes should preferably be made in stop mode. Description rPI ACC AC2 dE2 dEC tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 LSP HSP ItH (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.1 to 999. Please refer to OLL on page 61 if you wish to suppress thermal protection.1 to 999. Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to 100 10% as % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to (100-tA1) 10% as % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to 100 10% as % of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to (100-tA3) 10% as % of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) Low speed 0 to HSP 0 Hz (Motor frequency at min. according to the dynamics of the machine.1 StA correct Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 StA high In this case.1 to 30 s 0.5 s Level of automatic standstill DC injection current See page 41 0 to 1. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed.2 0. Too high a gain may result in operating instability.4 0.5 t In this case.7 In (1) via logic input or selected as stop mode (2). Total DC injection braking time selected as stop See page 39 0. to aid programming their description is detailed in these menus. • If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state.3 0. Frequency loop gain 1 to 100% 20 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 21) = n or nLd.5 t 0 0. Level of DC injection braking current activated See page 39 0 to In (1) 0.3 0.1 0. increase StA Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0. The FLG parameter adjusts the drive’s ability to follow the speed ramp based on the inertia of the machine being driven.2 In (1) 0.2 0.5 t StA low In this case.1 0. Modifying UFt (page 21) will cause UFr to return to the factory setting (20%). • If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.5 t Adjustment range 0 to 100% Factory setting FLG FLG low Hz 50 40 FLG correct Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 FLG high In this case.3 0.4 0. (2) Caution: These settings are not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function.1 0. reduce FLG 0 0.3 0.For UFt = L or P: Voltage boost Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase UFr if the torque is insufficient).5 In (1) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.4 0. increase FLG 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.Settings menu SEt- SEtCode UFr Description IR compensation/voltage boost 20 . The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact.For UFt (page 21) = n or nLd: IR compensation .2 0. Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.5 s mode (2).7 In (1) 2nd automatic standstill DC injection time See page 41 0 to 30 s 0s 2nd level of standstill DC injection current See page 41 0 to 1.1 0.3 0.5 t SLP IdC tdC tdC1 SdC1 tdC2 SdC2 Slip compensation 0 to 150% 100 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 21) = n or nLd. When the corresponding function is also accessible and adjustable from within the configuration menu.1 to 30 s 0.1 0.3 0. Those which are underlined appear in factory settings mode.4 0. Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration).5 t StA Frequency loop stability 1 to 100% 20 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 21) = n or nLd.2 0. reduce StA 0. Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0. on the pages indicated. 17 .4 0. Check that the value of UFr is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability).2 In (1) 0.2 0.2 0.4 0. Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed. Automatic standstill DC injection time See page 41 0. 25 to 1. to aid programming their description is detailed in these menus. 18 .01 to 100 1 PI regulator integral gain See page 51 0. The motor restarts if the frequency reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present. Caution: Value 0 corresponds to an unlimited time Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) See page 52 0 to 100% 0 IR compensation. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive. 0 to 500 0 Hz 2nd skip frequency Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JF2. motor 2 See page 57 0 to 100% 20 Frequency loop gain. 2nd current limit See page 55 0. motor 2 See page 57 0 to 150% 100% Description JF2 JGF rPG rIG FbS PIC rP2 rP3 rP4 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 CLI CL2 tLS rSL UFr2 FLG2 StA2 SLP2 (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. motor 2 See page 57 1 to 100% 20 Slip compensation. on the pages indicated.5 In (1) 1. This function prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance.Settings menu SEt- SEtCode JPF Adjustment Factory setting range Skip frequency 0 to 500 0 Hz Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JPF. When the corresponding function is also accessible and adjustable from within the configuration menu.9 s 0 (no time limit) Following operation at LSP for a defined period.01 to 100/s 1/s PI feedback multiplication coefficient See page 51 0.25 to 1. a motor stop is requested automatically.5 In (1) 1. Those which are underlined appear in factory settings mode. This function prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.1 to 100 1 Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI See page 51 nO . Jog operating frequency See page 46 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz PI regulator proportional gain See page 51 0. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. motor 2 See page 57 1 to 100% 20 Stability.5 In (1) Low speed operating time 0 to 999.5 In (1) Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor.YES nO regulator 2nd preset PI reference See page 51 0 to 100% 30% 3rd preset PI reference See page 51 0 to 100% 60% 4th preset PI reference See page 51 0 to 100% 90% 2nd preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz 3rd preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 15 Hz 4th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 20 Hz 5th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 25 Hz th 6 preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 30 Hz 7th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 35 Hz 8th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 40 Hz 9th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 45 Hz 10th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 50 Hz 11th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 55 HZ 12th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 60 Hz 13th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 70 Hz th 14 preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 80 Hz 15th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 90 Hz 16th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 100 Hz Current limit 0. SPd3 is displayed (possible definition = 1) . . 19 .0 to 16 kHz This parameter can also be accessed in the drC.1) .If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 9999: Display of Spd3 = SdS x rFr to 2 decimal places 1000 Adjustment range 0 to 500 Hz Factory setting Example: For 24 223. SFr 4 kHz (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. SPd2 is displayed (possible definition = 0. display is 24. the motor speed.1 to 200 30 menu on page 65) Used to scale a value in proportion to the output frequency rFr: the machine speed.54 Example: Display motor speed for 4-pole motor. SPd1 is displayed (possible definition = 0.5 In (1) In (1) (R1 or R2 = CtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = CtA) Scale factor for display parameter SPd1/SPd2/SPd3 (SUP0.If SdS y 1.Settings menu SEt- SEtCode Ftd ttd Ctd SdS Description Motor frequency threshold above which the relay contact bFr (R1 or R2 = FtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = StA) Motor thermal state threshold above which the relay contact (R1 0 to 118% 100% or R2 = tSA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = tSA) Motor current threshold beyond which the relay contact 0 to 1.If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 65535. display locked at 65.menu. 1500 rpm at 50 Hz (synchronous speed): SdS = 30 SPd3 = 1500 at rFr = 50 Hz Switching frequency See page 22 2.01) .22 .If 1 < SdS y 10. etc.If SdS > 10. Performing an auto-tune operation (on a standard asynchronous motor) position.slip as a % 100 50 .slip in Hz 60 (50 Hz motors) (60 Hz motors) 0. ATV31pppS6X: 17 max. Ftd page 19. Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate According to drive According to drive rating rating ATV31pppM2: 100 to 240 V ATV31pppM3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31pppN4: 100 to 500 V ATV31pppS6X: 100 to 600 V Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz The ratio UnS (in volts) must not exceed the following values: FrS (in Hz) UnS FrS nCr nSP ATV31pppM2: 7 max.76 KRPM If.Motor control menu drC- ENT drC- ESC ESC bFr tAI ESC ENT Standard motor frequency ESC FCS ESC ENT Return to factory settings/restore configuration With the exception of tUn.00 to 32. which can power up the motor. or preset to 60 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz. 20 . parameters can only be modified in stop mode. the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %. drCCode bFr Description Adjustment range Factory setting Standard motor frequency 50 50 Hz: IEC 60 Hz: NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP page 16. Nominal motor current given on the rating plate 0. calculate the nominal speed as follows: • Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or • Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or • Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x COS Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate 100 .5 In (1) Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate 0 to 32760 RPM According to drive rating According to drive rating 0 to 9999 RPM then 10. this menu can be accessed with the switch in the Drive performance can be optimized by: .5 to 1 According to drive rating (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. ATV31pppN4: 14 max. rather than the nominal speed. The factory setting is 50 Hz. ATV31pppM3X: 7 max. FrS page 20 and tFr page 22. On the optional remote terminal.slip in Hz 50 60 .Entering the values given on the motor rating plate in the drive menu .25 to 1. with no run command present. POn: Auto-tuning is performed on every power-up. Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio n L: Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors P: Variable torque: pump and fan applications n: Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications nLd: Energy saving. the stator resistance is measured with an auto-tune. rUn: Auto-tuning is performed every time a run command is sent. FrS. wait for the display to change to "dOnE" or "nO". Auto-tuning is only performed if no command has been activated. for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load) Voltage UnS tUn tUS UFt L n P FrS Frequency 21 . Caution: tUn is forced to POn if rSC is other than nO. PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed. dOnE: Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed. Do not interrupt. At the next run command. Caution: • It is strongly recommended that this function is activated in Lifting and Handling applications. Auto-tuning status tAb (information only. Parameter rSC then changes to this value (XXXX) and maintains it. InIt: Activates the function. cannot be modified) tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor. For applications which do not require high performance or do not tolerate automatic autotuning (passing a current through the motor) each time the drive is powered up. parameter tUn is forced to POn. dOnE: The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor.Motor control menu drC- drCCode rSC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Cold state stator resistance nO nO: Function inactive. tUn remains forced to POn. then the parameter automatically switches to dOnE or nO in the event of a fault (the tnF fault is displayed if tnL = YES (see page 62). LI1 to LI6: Auto-tuning is performed on the transition from 0 V 1 of a logic input assigned to this function. YES: Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible. • When rSC = InIt. • Value XXXX can be forced or modified using the keys. in mΩ. During auto-tuning the motor operates at nominal current. nO: Auto-tuning not performed. nSP. PrOG: Auto-tuning in progress FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed. XXXX: Value of cold state stator resistance used. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function is assigned to a logic input. nCr. Parameter rSC remains at InIt as long as the measurement has not been performed. COS) are configured correctly before performing auto-tuning. • The function should only be activated (InIt) when the motor is in cold state. this input must be set to 1 (active at 0). Strd: The cold state stator resistance (rSC other than nO) that is used to control the motor. Motor control auto-tuning nO It is essential that all the motor parameters (UnS. To improve low-speed performance whatever the thermal state of the motor. If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO. InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account.1 0.5 t Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0. FIL3.2 0. in addition to the current configuration. In both cases. as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): FIL1. the following additional selection options will appear: FIL1. (2) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-). or preset to 72 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz. Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.4 0. They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations which may be loaded on the remote terminal. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. this reduces the response time and the reference may be exceeded). FIL4 (files available in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration).3 0. (1) SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole. FIL4. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed.Motor control menu drC- drCCode nrd Description Adjustment range Factory setting Random switching frequency YES YES: Frequency with random modulation nO: Fixed frequency Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency. Switching frequency 2.3 0. FIL2. Return to factory settings/restore configuration nO (1) nO: Function inactive rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. the ENT key must be held down for 2 s. in the event of an excessive rise in temperature. Suppression of the speed loop filter nO nO: The speed loop filter is active (prevents the reference being exceeded).4 0. the following additional selection options appear. For rECI. When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. Maximum output frequency 10 to 500 Hz 60 Hz The factory setting is 60 Hz. InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. If the frequency has been set to a value higher than 4 kHz. the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and increase it again once the temperature has returned to normal.1 0. this means that a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. this means that the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example). FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. YES: The speed loop filter is suppressed (in position control applications. FIL2. • If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive. check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed.5 t SFr tFr SrF SrF = nO SrF = YES SCS FCS Saving the configuration nO (1) nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. • If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive.2 0. 22 . FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO.0 to 16 kHz 4 kHz (1) The frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor. FIL3. in order to prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply. nO: Not assigned LI2: Logic input LI2. trn: A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation. tCt and all functions affecting logic inputs. this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position. reverse operation is active. Wiring example: LI1: forward LIx: reverse ATV 31 24 V LI1 LIx 3-wire control (pulse control): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to control starting. can be accessed if tCC = 2C LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 rrS 23 . a "stop" pulse is sufficient to control stopping. This causes the following functions to return to their factory setting: rrS. Example of wiring: ATV 31 LI1: stop 24 V LI1 LI2 LIx LI2: forward LIx: reverse To change the assignment of tCC press the "ENT" key for 2 s. PFO: State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop. Reverse operation via logic input if tCC = 2C: LI2 if tCC = 3C: LI3 if tCC = LOC: nO If rrS = nO. but the "forward" input always takes priority over the "reverse" input. tCt Type of 2-wire control (parameter only accessible if tCC = 2C) trn LEL: State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop. see page 33). I-OCode tCC Description Factory setting 2-wire/3-wire control 2C (Type of control) ATV31pppA: LOC Control configuration: 2C = 2-wire control 3C = 3-wire control LOC = local control (drive RUN/STOP/RESET) for ATV31pppA only (invisible if LAC = L3. 2-wire control: The open or closed state of the input controls running or stopping.I/O menu I-O- ENT I-O- ESC ESC tCC ESC ENT 2-wire/3-wire control ESC FCS ESC ENT Return to factory settings/restore configuration The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. On the optional remote terminal. by means of negative voltage on AI2 for example. even if LFL = nO (page 62) The logic output is in state 1 (24 V) when the selected assignment is active.4 mA HSP LSP 0 CrL3 CrH3 20 AI 3 (mA) LSP 0 CrH3 (4 mA) CrL3 (20 mA) AI 3 (mA) AO1t dO Configuration of the analog output 0A 0A: 0 . can be set between 0 and 20 mA 4 mA Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3. Frequency Frequency HSP Example: 20 . etc.menu.menu. with the exception of FLt (powered up if the drive is not faulty). page 19) bLC: Brake sequence (for information. page 19) APL: Loss of 4-20 mA signal. page 19) FLA: High speed (HSP) reached CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt.menu. (1) With these assignments. even if LFL = nO (page 62) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active.menu. with the exception of FLt (powered up if the drive is not faulty). OPr: Power supplied by the drive. even if LFL = nO (page 62) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active. can be set between 4 and 20 mA 20 mA These two parameters are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA. as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated from the FUn.menu.menu. Otr: Motor torque. r1 r2 Relay r1 FLt nO: Not assigned FLt: Drive fault rUn: Drive running FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt.I/O menu I-O- I-OCode CrL3 CrH3 Description Factory setting Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3. Relay r2 nO nO: Not assigned FLt: Drive fault rUn: Drive running FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to the maximum frequency tFr (page 22). 24 . 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal motor torque. configure AOt = 0A. as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated from the FUn. 4-20 mA.menu. page 19) SrA: Frequency reference reached tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt. OFr: Motor frequency. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive current.20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC) 4A: 4 . 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive power. Making the following assignments (1) will transform the analog output to a logic output (see the diagram in the Installation Manual): FLt: Drive fault rUn: Drive running FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt.20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC) 10U: 0 . with the exception of FLt (state 1 if the drive is not faulty). see page 54) APL: Loss of 4-20 mA signal.menu. page 19) SrA: Frequency reference reached tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt.menu. 20-4 mA. page 19) FLA: High speed (HSP) reached CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt.menu. page 19) FLA: High speed (HSP) reached CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt. page 19) bLC: Brake sequence (for information. page 19) SrA: Frequency reference reached tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt.10 V configuration (use terminal AOV) Analog/logic output AOC/AOV nO nO: Not assigned OCr: Motor current. see page 54) APL: Loss of 4-20 mA signal.menu. FIL3. Return to factory settings/restore configuration (1) nO: Function inactive rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. this means that the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example). SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. FIL2. in addition to the current configuration. this means that a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. FIL3. InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account. If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. the following additional selection options appear. the following additional selection options will appear: FIL1. the ENT key must be held down for 2 s. (1) SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed.I/O menu I-O- I-OCode SCS Description Factory setting Saving the configuration (1) nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. FIL4 (files available in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration). They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. FIL4. • If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. For rECI. • If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive. as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): FIL1. check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote terminal. FIL2. In both cases. FCS 25 . Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once FCS has switched to nO. • With a remote terminal.speed (motorized potentiometer) . Modbus.) LOC: Keypad (RUN/STOP) on ATV31pppA only LCC: Remote terminal (RJ45 socket) Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket) CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket) Reference rFr AI1-AI2-AI3: Terminal AIP: Potentiometer on ATV31pppA only LCC: ATV31 keypad or ATV31pppA keypad or remote terminal Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket) CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket) Note: The STOP keys on the keypad and the remote terminal may retain priority (PSt parameter in the CtL. if LCC = YES (CtL. Provides the option of additional functions compared with L1: . 26 . control is via the keypad and the reference is set via the potentiometer for this keypad.Control menu CtL- ENT CtL- ESC ESC LAC Fr1 ESC ENT Function access level ESC FCS ESC ENT Return to factory settings/restore configuration The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. control and reference are managed by the remote terminal (reference via LFr. Remote terminal. control and reference are managed by the terminal. in factory settings mode. On the optional remote terminal.Brake control . Control and reference channels Run commands (forward.+/. The LAC parameter in the CtL. plus mixed mode for control and reference channels. • On ATV31pppA drives. CANopen.Management of limit switches Same options as with L2. • On ATV31 drives. this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position. SEtmenu). etc. Terminal/Keypad LCC Remote terminal Modbus CANopen FLO Forced local mode See the detailed diagrams on pages 28 and 29. in factory settings mode. This level is interchangeable with ATV28. Highest priority to lowest priority: Local forcing.menu can be used to select priority modes for the control and reference channels.Motor switching .menu). It has 3 function levels: • LAC = L1: • LAC = L2: Basic functions. reverse.menu). • LAC = L3: These channels can be combined as follows if parameter LAC = L1 or L2.) and references can be sent using the following methods: Command CMD tEr: Terminal (LI. with priority via communication bus. Terminal/Keypad (from right to left in the diagram below).Switching for 2nd current limit . Combined control and reference (parameter CHCF = SIM): Selection of reference channel: parameter Fr1 The control channel is connected to the same source. See the detailed diagrams on pages 30 and 31. 27 . See the detailed diagrams on pages 30 et 32. Control and reference H.Control menu CtLThese channels can be combined in other ways described below if LAC = L3.+ Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either. Separate control and reference (parameter CHCF = SEP): Reference Selection of reference channel: parameter Fr1 Reference Selection of reference channel: parameter Fr2 H. Control Selection of control channel: parameter Cdl Control Selection of control channel: parameter Cd2 ++5 Parameter CCS can be used to select channel Cd1 or Cd2 or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either.+ Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either. Selection of reference channel: parameter Fr2 The control channel is connected to the same source. speed command is configured (Fr1 = UPdt or UPdH). LFr SA2 nO AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP (SP1) SP2 LI SP16 LI PI not assigned nO PI assigned Jog operation SA3 nO AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP nO AI1 AI2 AI3 PIF PI function see page 49 YES PIF ) Channel 1 Ramps nO nO HSP nO LSP . summing inputs SA2/SA3 are not active. Key: Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment Function accessible for LAC = L2 28 .Control menu CtLReference channel for LAC = L1 or L2 Fr1 UPdt UPdH AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP Preset speeds nO Remote terminal + speed speed Note: If the +/.H UPdt UPdH nO AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP + speed speed * Channel 2 Fr2 rFC LCC Modbus Forced local mode CANopen FLO "Modbus" or "CANopen" is selected online by writing the appropriate control word (see the busspecific documentation).H0 ACC DEC AC2 DE2 H. tCC LI LI 2C 3C LOC LCC nO YES nO LI FLO CMD Forward Reverse STOP Modbus RUN STOP RUN STOP FWD / REV Remote terminal CANopen ATV31pppA keypad ATV31pppA keypad STOP nO YES STOP Remote terminal Key: Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment (STOP priority) PSt 29 . LCC and the selection of the Modbus or CANopen bus are common to the reference and control channels. Example: LCC = YES sets the drive to control and reference via the remote terminal.Control menu CtLControl channel for LAC = L1 or L2 Parameters FLO. summing inputs SA2/SA3 are not active. FLOC AI1 AI2 AI1 AI2 LFr Remote terminal AI3 AIP LCC Mdb Preset speeds nO LFr Remote terminal AI3 AIP LCC (SP1) CAn SP2 SA2 nO LI AI1 Mdb AI2 CAn SP16 LI Jog operation PI not assigned nO PIF LFr Remote terminal AI3 AIP LCC PI assigned Channel 1 Ramps HSP nO nO Mdb CAn LI SA3 nO AI1 AI2 .H Channel 2 rFC FLO LSP AC2 DE2 Forced local mode LFr Remote terminal AI3 AIP LCC nO Mdb AI1 CAn AI2 PIF ) PI function see page 49 Fr2 UPdt UPdH AI3 + speed speed * nO AI1 AI2 Key: LFr Remote terminal AI3 AIP LCC Mdb CAn Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment 30 .speed command is configured (Fr1 = UPdt or UPdH).H0 ACC DEC H.Control menu CtLReference channel for LAC = L3 Fr1 UPdt UPdH + speed speed Note: If the +/. Control menu CtLControl channel for LAC = L3 Combined reference and control Parameters Fr1.. Fr1 LI LI UPdt UPdH AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LCC Mdb CAn ATV31pppA keypad FLOC AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LCC (RUN / STOP) (RUN / STOP FWD / REV ATV31pppA keypad RUN STOP RUN / STOP FWD / REV Remote terminal LI Remote terminal rFC SEP CHCF FLO nO ATV31pppA keypad Forced local mode SIM STOP nO YES CMD Forward Reverse STOP Fr2 LI UPdt UPdH nO AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LCC Mdb CAn STOP Remote terminal PSt (STOP has priority) ATV31pppA keypad RUN STOP RUN / STOP FWD / REV Key: Remote terminal Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment 31 . Fr2. The control channel is therefore determined by the reference channel. FLO and FLOC are common to reference and control. rFC. Example: If reference Fr1 = AI1 (analog input on terminal block) control is via LI (logic input on terminal block). Control menu CtLControl channel for LAC = L3 Mixed mode (separate reference and control) Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and control. Cd1 LI LI tEr FLOC AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LCC ATV31pppA keypad RUN STOP LOC Keypad ATV31pppA (RUN / STOP) RUN / STOP FWD / REV (RUN / STOP LCC Mdb CAn FWD / REV) Remote terminal Remote terminal LI LI CCS SIM CHCF SEP FLO nO Forced local ATV31pppA keypad STOP nO YES CMD Forward Reverse STOP Cd2 LI tEr STOP Remote terminal (STOP has priority) PSt ATV31pppA keypad RUN STOP LOC RUN / STOP FWD / REV LCC Mdb CAn Remote terminal Key: Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment 32 . Example: If the reference is in local forced mode via AI1 (analog input on terminal block) control in local forced mode is via LI (logic input on terminal block). Control menu CtL- There may be an incompatibility between functions (see the incompatibility table 13). For operation.menu page 16. CtLCode LAC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Function access level L1 L1: Access to standard functions. Significantly. Configuration reference 1 AI1 AIP for ATV31pppA AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only) If LAC = L2 or L3. Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen Configuration reference 2 nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only) If LAC = L2 or L3.Brake control .speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote terminal. display the frequency rFr (see page 65) If LAC = L3. The latter is forced to "2C" on ATV31pppA. LFr parameter in the SEt. Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen (1) Caution: You cannot assign UPdt to Fr1 or Fr2 and UPdH to Fr1 or Fr2 at the same time.speed (motorized potentiometer) .menu: . In this case. CHCF (page 34). the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured. For operation. the following additional assignments are possible: LCC: Reference via the remote terminal. this level is interchangeable with ATV28.menu page 16. In order to change the assignment of LAC. the following additional assignments are possible: UPdt: (1) + speed/. Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel.Switching for second current limit .Motor switching . Assigning LAC to L3 will restore the factory settings of the Fr1 (below). display the frequency rFr (see page 65) If LAC = L3. r r Fr1 Fr2 nO 33 .speed via LI UpdH: (1) + speed/. L2: Access to advanced functions in the FUn. the following additional assignments are possible: UPdt: (1) + speed/. Cd1 (page 34).speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote terminal. you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds.speed via LI UpdH: (1) + speed/. and tCC (page 23) parameters. the following additional assignments are possible: LCC: Reference via the remote terminal.Management of limit switches L3: Access to advanced functions and management of mixed control modes. LFr parameter in the SEt.+/. L3 can only be restored to L2 or L1 and L2 to L1 by means of a "factory setting" via FCS (page 36). 34 . Fr1: Reference = Reference 1 Fr2: Reference = Reference 2 LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. Mixed mode (control channels separated from reference channels) Can be accessed if LAC = L3 SIN: Combined SEP: Separate Configuration of control channel 1 CHCF SIM Cd1 tEr LOC for ATV31pppA Cd2 Can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 tEr: Terminal block control LOC: Keypad control (ATV31pppA only) LCC: Remote terminal control Ndb: Control via Modbus CAn: Control via CAN Configuration of control channel 2 Can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 tEr: Terminal block control LOC: Keypad control (ATV31pppA only) LCC: Remote terminal control Ndb: Control via Modbus CAn: Control via CAN Mdb: These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. Fr2 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1. Fr1 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0. the following additional assignments are possible: C111: Bit 11 of the Modbus control word C112: Bit 12 of the Modbus control word C113: Bit 13 of the Modbus control word C114: Bit 14 of the Modbus control word C115: Bit 15 of the Modbus control word C211: Bit 11 of the CANopen control word C212: Bit 12 of the CANopen control word C213: Bit 13 of the CANopen control word C214: Bit 14 of the CANopen control word C215: Bit 15 of the CANopen control word The reference can be switched with the drive running.Control menu CtL- CtLCode rFC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Reference switching Fr1 Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Fr1 or Fr2. regardless of the control channel (terminal block or communication bus). LCC Control via remote terminal nO Parameter can only be accessed with the remote terminal option and if LAC = L1 or L2. COp PSt rOt These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. If the drive/terminal connection is cut or if the terminal has not been connected. Channel 2 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 1. Direction of operation authorized dFr Direction of operation authorized for the RUN key on the keypad (ATV31pppA only) or the RUN key on the remote terminal. fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. The speed reference is then given by parameter LFr in the SEt. 35 . you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds. nO: Function inactive YES: Enables control of the drive using the STOP/RESET. nO: Function inactive YES: STOP key priority In order to change the assignment of PSt. In this case. • The reference copied is FrH (before ramp) unless the channel 2 reference is set via +/.Control menu CtL- CtLCode CCS Description Adjustment range Factory setting Control channel switching Cd1 Can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 Parameter CCS can be used to select channel Cd1 or Cd2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Cd1 or Cd2. dFr: Forward drS: Reverse bOt: Both directions are authorized (except for the keypad on the ATV31pppA: Forward only). RUN and FWD/REV buttons on the terminal.Copying the control and/or the reference may change the direction of rotation. the reference copied is rFr (after ramp) . Stop priority YES This function gives priority to the STOP key on the keypad (ATV31pppA only) or the STOP key on the remote terminal. channel 1 control is not copied.menu. Copy channel 1 to channel 2 nO (copy only in this direction) Can be accessed if LAC = L3 nO: No copy SP: Copy reference Cd: Copy control ALL: Copy control and reference • If channel 2 is controlled via the terminal block. Only the freewheel.speed. channel 1 reference is not copied. AI2. the drive locks in an SLF fault. • If channel 2 reference is set via AI1. AI3 or AIP. Cd1: Control channel = Channel 1 Cd2: Control channel = Channel 2 LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 C111: Bit 11 of the Modbus control word C112: Bit 12 of the Modbus control word C113: Bit 13 of the Modbus control word C114: Bit 14 of the Modbus control word C115: Bit 15 of the Modbus control word C211: Bit 11 of the CANopen control word C212: Bit 12 of the CANopen control word C213: Bit 13 of the CANopen control word C214: Bit 14 of the CANopen control word C215: Bit 15 of the CANopen control word Channel 1 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 0. the following additional selection options appear. Return to factory settings/Restore configuration (1) nO: Function inactive rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once FCS has switched to nO. FIL3. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. FIL4 (files available in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration). the following additional selection options will appear: FIL1. this means that the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example).Control menu CtL- CtLCode SCS Description Adjustment range Factory setting Saving the configuration (1) nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. (1) SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve. If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO. In both cases. InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): FIL1. For rECI. InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account. FIL4. FCS 36 . When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. • If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. the ENT key must be held down for 2 s. FIL3. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. in addition to the current configuration. They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote terminal. FIL2. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. FIL2. • If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive. this means that a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. 5 x t1 with t1 = set ramp time.for example. There may be an incompatibility between functions (see the incompatibility table 13). t1 t2 t 0 t1 t2 t 0 Customized ramps f (Hz) HSP f (Hz) HSP 0 tA1 tA2 ACC or AC2 0 t tA3 tA4 dEC or dE2 t tA1: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of ACC or AC2) tA2: Can be set between 0 and (100% . FUnCode rPCrPt Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ramps Type of ramp Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps. the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured. sub-menus are identified by a dash after their code: PSS.tA1) (of ACC or AC2) tA3: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of dEC or dE2) tA4: Can be set between 0 and (100% . with t2 = 0. Some functions have numerous parameters. Like menus.tA3) (of dEC or dE2) 0 to 100 10% tA1 Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded as % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.6 x t1 with t1 = set ramp time. LIn: Linear S: S ramp U: U ramp CUS: Customized S ramps f (Hz) HSP f (Hz) HSP LIn The curve coefficient is fixed.Application functions menu FUn- ENT FUn- ESC rPCSA1FCS ENT ENT ESC ESC Sub-menu ESC ENT ENT Sub-menu ESC ESC ESC ENT ESC The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. 37 . with t2 = 0. In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through endless parameters. On the optional remote terminal. these functions have been grouped in sub-menus. this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position. In this case. t2 t1 t 0 t2 t1 t 0 f (Hz) HSP U ramps f (Hz) HSP The curve coefficient is fixed. AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1. Ramp switching threshold 0 to 500 Hz 0 The second ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not equal to 0 (0 deactivates the function) and the output frequency is greater than Frt. dE2 AC2. the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word ACC and dEC are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0.1 to 999. 2nd deceleration ramp time (1): 0.menu.9 s 3s Defined for accelerating and decelerating between 0 and the nominal frequency FrS (parameter in the drC.9 s 5s Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt). Deceleration ramp adaptation YES Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp. 38 . Threshold ramp switching can be combined with switching via LI or bit as follows: LI or bit 0 0 1 1 AC2 Frequency <Frt >Frt <Frt >Frt Ramp ACC. dE2 rPS Frt dE2 brA 2nd acceleration ramp time (1): 0.1 to 999. nO: Function inactive YES: Function active.9 s 3s 0.9 s 5s Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt).Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode rPC(continued) tA2 tA3 tA4 ACC dEC Description Adjustment Factory setting range End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded as 0 to (100-tA1) 10% % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded 0 to 100 10% as % of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) End of CUS-type deceleration ramp 0 to (100-tA3) 10% as % of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) Acceleration and deceleration ramp times (1) 0. Ramp switching nO This function remains active regardless of the control channel. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. Check that the value of dEC is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped.1 to 999.1 to 999. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. if this has been set at too low a value for the inertia of the load. (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the SEt.menu). dEC AC2. The function is incompatible with applications requiring: • Positioning on a ramp • The use of a braking resistor (no guarantee of the function operating correctly) brA is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 54). dE2 AC2. The fast stop is a stop on a reduced ramp via parameter dCF. see page 23). the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Braking is activated when the logic state of the input or control word bit is at 1. 39 . Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp 0 to 10 4 time for fast stopping.7 In (2) via logic input or selected as stop mode (1)(3) After 5 seconds the injection current is peak limited at 0. the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been configured (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO. Level of DC injection braking current activated 0 to In (2) 0. In other cases. DC injection via logic input nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word The stop is activated when the logic state of the input changes to 0 and the control word bit changes to 1.5 s normal stop mode (1)(3) FSt dCF dCI IdC tdC (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-). rMP: On ramp FSt: Fast stop nSt: Freewheel stop dCI: DC injection stop Fast stop via logic input nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. Total DC injection braking time selected as 0. If the input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active.Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode StCStt Description Adjustment range Factory setting Stop modes Normal stop mode Stn Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.5 Ith if it is set at a higher value. (3) Caution: These settings are not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function. Ensure that the reduced ramp is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. The value 0 corresponds to the minimum ramp. (2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.1 to 30 s 0. a new run command must be sent. the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been configured. In other cases. 40 . a new run command must be sent.Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode StC(continued) nSt Description Freewheel stop via logic input nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Adjustment range Factory setting nO The stop is activated when the input is in logic state 0. If the input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active. Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode AdCAdC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Standstill DC injection Automatic standstill DC injection YES (at the end of the ramp) nO: No injection YES: Standstill injection for adjustable period Ct: Continuous standstill injection This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent. It can be accessed with the drive running. Automatic standstill DC injection time (1) Level of automatic standstill DC injection current (1) 0.1 to 30 s 0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.5 s 0.7 In (2) tdC1 SdC1 Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating. tdC2 SdC2 2 automatic standstill DC injection time (1) 2nd level of standstill DC injection current (1) nd 0 to 30 s 0 to 1.2 In (2) 0s 0.5 In (2) Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating. AdC SdC2 Operation I SdC1 YES x SdC2 tdC1 tdC1 + tdC2 t I Ct ≠0 SdC1 SdC2 tdC1 t I Ct =0 SdC1 t Run command 1 0 t Speed 0 t (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-). (2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. 41 Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode SAISA2 Description Adjustment range Factory setting Summing inputs Can be used to sum one or two inputs to reference Fr1 only. Summing input 2 nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (type A drives only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen LCC: Reference via the remote terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 16. Summing input 3 nO nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (type A drives only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen LCC: Reference via the remote terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 16. AI2 SA3 Summing inputs .H 5) 5)! See the complete diagrams on pages 28 and 30. Note: AI2 is an input ± 10 V, which can allow a subtraction by summing a negative signal. 42 Application functions menu FUnPreset speeds 2, 4, 8 or 16 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2, 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively. The following order of assignments must be observed: PS2, then PS4 then PS8, then PS16. Combination table for preset speed inputs 16 speeds LI (PS16) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 speeds LI (PS8) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 4 speeds LI (PS4) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 2 speeds LI (PS2) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Speed reference Reference (1) SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 (1) See the diagrams on page 28 and page 30: Reference 1 = (SP1). 43 Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode PSSPS2 Description Adjustment range Factory setting Preset speeds 2 preset speeds Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 4 preset speeds Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS2 has been assigned before assigning PS4. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 8 preset speeds Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS4 has been assigned before assigning PS8. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word If tCC = 2C: LI3 If tCC = 3C: nO If tCC = LOC: LI3 PS4 If tCC = 2C: LI4 If tCC = 3C: nO If tCC = LOC: LI4 PS8 nO 44 0 to 500.0 Hz 8th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 to 500. Check that PS8 has been assigned before assigning PS16.0 to 500.0 to 500.0 Hz 11th preset speed (1) 0.0 Hz 12th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 to 500. the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 2nd preset speed (1) 0.0 Hz rd 3 preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 13th preset speed (1) 0.0 Hz 4th preset speed (1) 0.0 Hz SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 10 Hz 15 Hz 20 Hz 25 Hz 30 Hz 35 Hz 40 Hz 45 Hz 50 Hz 55 Hz 60 Hz 70 Hz 80 Hz 90 Hz 100 Hz (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-).Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode PS16 Description Adjustment range Factory setting nO 16 preset speeds Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.0 Hz 7th preset speed (1) 0.0 Hz 15th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 5th preset speed (1) 0. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.0 Hz 6th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3.0 to 500.0 Hz 10th preset speed (1) 0. 45 .0 to 500.0 to 500.0 to 500.0 to 500.0 Hz 14th preset speed (1) 0.0 Hz 16th preset speed (1) 0.0 Hz 9th preset speed (1) 0. Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode JOGJOG Description Jog operation Jog operation Adjustment range Factory setting If tCC = 2C: nO If tCC = 3C: LI4 If tCC = LOC: nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.5 s Forward   Reverse   JGF Jog operation reference (1) 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-).1 s JGF reference LI (JOG)   u 0. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Example: 2-wire control operation (tCC = 2C) Motor frequency Reference JGF reference  Ramp DEC/DE2 Ramp forced to 0. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. 46 . Released (.speed" the value of reference rFr (after ramp) is copied at the same time.speed The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (see page 33). 2 Use of double action buttons: Only one logic input assigned to "+ speed" is required. + speed/.speed) Forward button Reverse button Example of wiring: LI1: forward LIx: reverse LIy: + speed ATV 31 control terminals LI1 LIx LIy + 24 b a c d 1st press (speed maintained) a c 2nd press (+ speed) a and b c and d – – Motor frequency LSP 0 LSP Forward 2nd press 1st press 0 Reverse 2nd press 1st press 0 b a a a b a a a a d c c This type of +/. Note: If the reference is switched via rFC (see page 34) from any reference channel to another with "+/.Application functions menu FUn+/. 47 . Whichever type of operation is selected. 1 Use of single action buttons: Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction(s). Each action closes a contact. the input assigned to the ". the max. The input assigned to the "+ speed" command increases the speed.speed is incompatible with 3-wire control. speed is set by HSP (see page 16).speed" command decreases the speed. This prevents the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.speed with double action buttons: Description: 1 button pressed twice for each direction of rotation. Two types of operation are available. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 . Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: No save rAN: Save to RAM EEP: Save to EEPROM USP dSP Str These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.speed" function. 48 . nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Save reference nO Associated with the "+/. + speed nO Can only be accessed for UPdt. the speed reference is the last reference saved.Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode UPdDescription Adjustment range Factory setting +/. this parameter can be used to save the reference: • When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM) • When the mains supply or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM) On the next start-up. Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.speed nO Can only be accessed for UPdt.speed (motorized potentiometer) The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdH or UPdt has been selected (see page 33). H0 Ramps Reference A Pages 28 and 30 YES x1 x(-1) ACC DEC AC2 DE2 H. E. rP3.g. the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive. sensor scale/Max. for example: pressure control with a compressor.Reference Fr1 (see page 33) Combination table for preset PI references LI (Pr4) 0 0 1 1 LI (Pr2) 0 1 0 1 Pr2 = nO Reference rPI or Fr1 rPI or Fr1 rP2 rP3 rP4 Parameters which can be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-): • Internal reference (rPI) • Preset references (rP2. PI reference: The PI reference can be assigned to the following parameters in order of priority: .H PIF nO PI AI1 feedback Preset PI references Key: Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment FbS x FbS AI2 AI3 Reference B Pages 28 and 30 PI feedback: The PI feedback must be assigned to one of the analog inputs (AI1. for example: temperature control via a cooling fan. • Reversal of the direction of correction (PIC): If PIC = nO.10 bar FbS = Max. rP3. LI Internal reference rPI YES nO PII Pr2 Pr4 (rP1) rP2 rP3 rP4 nO + - PIC nO Error inversion Restart error threshold (wake-up) tLS rSL 0 rIG rPG Gains PIF nO AI1 AI2 AI3 rFC (auto) (manu) HSP LSP .100%) Rating of pressure sensor 0 .5 bar (0 . AI2 or AI3).: Pressure control PI reference (process) 0 .Preset references via logic inputs (rP2. rP4) . 49 . the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive.Internal reference (rPI) . rP4) • Regulator proportional gain (rPG) • Regulator integral gain (rIG) • FbS parameter: The FbS parameter can be used to scale the reference on the basis of the variation range of the PI feedback (sensor rating).Application functions menu FUnPI regulator Diagram The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PI feedback (measurement). process FbS = 10/5= 2 • rSL parameter: Can be used to set the PI error threshold above which the PI regulator will be reactivated (wake-up) after a stop due to the max. If PIC = YES. time threshold being exceeded at low speed (tLS). dEC) to the minimum permitted by the mechanics without triggering an ObF fault. Set the speed ramps (ACC.In transient state. the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly and the PI feedback must follow the speed. Switch to PI mode. If this is not the case. adjust rPG or rIG gradually and independently and observe the effect on the PI feedback in relation to the reference. the speed must be stable and comply with the reference and the PI feedback signal must be stable. If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state. Setting up the PI regulator 1 Configuration in PI mode See the diagram on page 49. The speed reference is given by Fr2 or by the PI function. Stabilization time Regulated value Reference Proportional gain rPG low Rise time time rIG high Reference Integral gain rIG low time Reference rPG and rIG correct rPG high Overshoot Static error time The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics. Perform in-production tests throughout the reference range. gradually increase the integral gain (rIG). Set the proportional gain (rPG) in order to ascertain the ideal compromise between response time and stability in transient phases (slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing). Set brA to no (no auto-adaptation of the ramp). depending on the state of the logic input. find a compromise between response time and static precision (see diagram).Automatic" operation with PI This function combines the PI regulator and the switching of reference rFC (page 34). reduce the proportional gain (rPG) in the event of instability (pump applications).Application functions menu FUn"Manual . 3 If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect: Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode (without PI regulator) and with the drive on load for the speed range of the system: . To optimize the drive. 2 Perform a test in factory settings mode (in most cases. see the settings for the drive and/or sensor signal and cabling. Set the integral gain (rIG) to minimum. this will be sufficient). Do several RUN/STOP or vary the load or reference rapidly.In steady state. Parameter rPG = rIG Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error 50 . . Observe the PI feedback and the reference. 01 to 100 1 Contributes to dynamic performance during rapid changes in the PI feedback. Check that Pr2 has been assigned before assigning Pr4. PI regulator integral gain (1) 0. 51 . nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 4 preset PI references nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 4th preset PI reference (1) 0 to 100% 90% Only appears if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input.01 to 100 1 Contributes to static precision during slow changes in the PI feedback. 3rd preset PI reference (1) 0 to 100% 60% Only appears if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input. the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 2nd preset PI reference (1) 0 to 100% 30% Only appears if Pr2 has been enabled by selecting an input.Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode PIPIF Description Adjustment range Factory setting PI regulator PI regulator feedback nO nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 PI regulator proportional gain (1) 0. PI feedback multiplication coefficient (1) 0. rPG rIG FbS PIC Pr2 Pr4 rP2 rP3 rP4 (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-).1 to 100 1 For process adaptation Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI nO regulator (1) nO: normal YES: reverse 2 preset PI references nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. . YES: The PI regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI.. Internal PI regulator reference nO nO: The PI regulator reference is Fr1.Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode PI(continued) rSL Description Adjustment Factory setting range Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) 0 to 100% 0 If the "PI" and "Low speed operating time"(tLS) (see page 18) functions are configured at the same time. This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting. and so on. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. The function is inactive if tLS = 0. operating at low speed then stopping. the PI regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP. Parameter rSL (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PI error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP. except for UPdH and UPdt (+/. Internal PI regulator reference (1) 0 to 100% 0 PII rPI (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-). 52 .speed cannot be used as the PI regulator reference). .menu: .Brake engage frequency (bEn) . making sure that the maximum load is held when the brake is released.Brake release pulse (bIP) Recommended settings for brake control: 1 Brake release frequency: .Brake engage time (bEt) .Application functions menu FUnBrake control The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28).Vertical movement: Set to a frequency equal to the nominal slip of the motor in Hz. which can be assigned to relay R2 or to logic output AOC. This function. Caution: bEn maxi = LSP. This parameter generates motor torque in an upward direction regardless of the direction of operation commanded in order to maintain the load whilst the brake is releasing. 5 Brake engage time (bEt): Adjust according to the type of brake. 53 . It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release. If necessary. reverse two motor phases. 3 Brake release time (brt): Adjust according to the type of brake. Principle: Synchronize brake release with the build-up of torque during start-up and brake engage at zero speed on stopping. you must therefore first set LSP to a sufficient value. . enables the drive to manage an electromagnetic brake.Vertical movement: Set to a frequency equal to the nominal slip of the motor in Hz. Brake sequence Motor speed Speed reference 0 t Relay R2 or logic output AOC 1 0 Motor current t brt Ibr 0 Motor frequency t bEt Speed reference brL bEn 0 LI forward or reverse t 1 0 t Brake status Engaged Released Engaged Settings which can be accessed in the FUn.Horizontal movement: Set to 0. 4 Brake engage frequency (bEn) .Brake release time (brt) .Horizontal movement: Set to nO.Vertical movement: Preset the nominal current of the motor then adjust it in order to prevent jolting on start-up. .Brake release current (Ibr) .Horizontal movement: Set to 0.Brake release frequency (brL) . . to prevent jolting. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage.Vertical movement: Set to YES and check that the motor torque direction for "Forward" control corresponds to the upward direction of the load.Horizontal movement: Set to 0. 2 Brake release current (Ibr): . 6 Brake release pulse: . If necessary. reference. the motor torque direction corresponds to the direction of rotation commanded.5 s Low speed 0 to HSP (page 16) 0 Hz Motor frequency at min.0 to LSP nO nO: Not adjusted 0 to LSP: Adjustment range (Hz) If bLC is assigned and bEn remains equal to nO. This parameter can also be modified in the SEt.menu (page 16). the drive will lock on a bLF fault at the first run command. parameter FLr (page 61) and brA (page 38) are forced to nO.0 to 10. 54 . These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. Brake control configuration nO nO: Not assigned r2: Relay R2 dO: Logic output AOC If bLC is assigned. Brake release frequency 0. brL Ibr brt LSP bEn bEt bIP (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Brake engage time 0 to 5 s 0.Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode bLCbLC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Brake control The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). reverse two motor phases. regardless of the direction of operation commanded.5 s Brake release pulse nO nO: Whilst the brake is releasing. YES: Whilst the brake is releasing.36 In (1) According to drive rating Brake release time 0 to 5 s 0. Brake engage frequency threshold nO . and parameter OPL (page 61) is forced to YES. Check that the motor torque direction for "Forward" control corresponds to the upward direction of the load. the motor torque direction is always forward.0 Hz According to drive rating Motor current threshold for brake release 0 to 1. the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word CL1 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0 (SEt. 55 . CL2 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1.5 In (2) 1. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3.25 to 1. 2nd current limit (1) 0. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode LC2LC2 Description Adjustment range Factory setting Switching for second current limit The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). (2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.menu page 18).5 In (2) nO CL2 (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-). Switching for second current limit Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. An external means of motor thermal protection must therefore be provided.slip as a % 100 50 . Switching.slip in Hz 60 (50 Hz motors) (60 Hz motors) (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-). .5 In (2) According to drive rating plate rating Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the 0 to 32760 RPM According to drive rating plate rating 0 to 9999 RPM then 10. Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the 0. (2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode CHPCHP Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor switching The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. The factory setting is 50 Hz. 56 . the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word LI or bit = 0: Motor 1 LI or bit = 1: Motor 2 .slip in Hz 50 60 . do not use the tUn auto-tuning function (page 21) on motor 2 and do not configure tUn = rUn or POn. . UnS2 Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the According to drive According to drive rating plate rating rating ATV31pppM2: 100 to 240 V ATV31pppM3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31pppN4: 100 to 500 V ATV31pppS6X: 100 to 600 V Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz the rating plate The ratio UnS (in volts) must not exceed the following values FrS (in Hz) nO FrS2 nCr2 nSP2 ATV31pppM2: 7 max. ATV31pppS6X: 17 max. ATV31pppM3X: 7 max. motor 2 nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3.25 to 1. or 60 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz.76 KRPM If. ATV31pppN4: 14 max.If you use this function.Changes to parameters are only taken into account when the drive is locked. calculate the nominal speed as follows: • Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or • Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or • Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x 100 . rather than the nominal speed. the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %.00 to 32.The motor switching function disables motor thermal protection. • If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state. reduce FLG2 0. motor 2 (1) 1 to 100% 20 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd. according to the dynamics of the machine. Too high a gain may result in operating instability.3 0.1 0.5 t Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.5 t FLG2 correct Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1 0. FLG2 low Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0. The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact.1 StA2 high In this case. increase StA2 In this case.5 t StA2 correct Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.2 0. Frequency loop gain.4 0.Application functions menu FUn- FUnCode CHP(continued) COS2 UFt2 Description Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating According to drive plate rating Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio n motor 2 L: Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors P: Variable torque: Pump and fan applications n: Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications nLd: Energy saving. For UFt2 = L or P: Voltage boost.2 0. • If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable. increase FLG2 In this case. Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed.5 t StA2 Frequency loop stability. Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase UFr2 if the torque is insufficient). Modifying UFt2 will cause UFr2 to return to the factory setting (20%).1 FLG2 high In this case.2 0.3 0. motor 2 (1) 1 to 100% 20 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd.4 0.1 0. Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration).2 0. for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load). 57 .5 to 1 Factory setting L n P FrS Frequency UFr2 FLG2 IR compensation/Voltage boost. Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed.3 0.4 0. motor 2 (1) 0 to 150% 100 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd.3 0. reduce StA2 0. motor 2 (1) 0 to 100% 20 For UFt2 = n or nLd: IR compensation. Check that the value of UFr2 is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability). StA2 low Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.2 0. (1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-).4 0.3 0.2 0. Voltage UnS Adjustment range 0.3 0.5 t SLP2 Slip compensation.5 t Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.4 0.1 0. The FLG2 parameter adjusts the drive’s ability to follow the speed ramp based on the inertia of the machine being driven. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.4 0. Limit. It can be used to manage the operation of one or two limit switches (1 or 2 directions of operation): . reverse limit) .The stop is performed when the input is in state 0. 58 .Application functions menu FUnManagement of limit switch The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28).Selection of the type of stop (on ramp. FUnCode LStLAF Description Adjustment range Factory setting Management of limit switches The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). reverse direction nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Type of limit switch stop rMP: On ramp FSt: Fast stop nSt: Freewheel stop nO LAr nO LAS nSt These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled via the selection of a logic input. forward direction nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Limit.Assignment of one or two logic inputs (forward limit. the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only. fast or freewheel) Following a stop. The direction of operation is authorized in state 1. . If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO. They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote terminal. FIL4 (files available in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration). the following additional selection options will appear: FIL1. FCS 59 . FIL3. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. the ENT key must be held down for 2 s. FIL2. InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. this means that a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. Return to factory setting/restore configuration (1) nO nO: Function inactive rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. • If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive. the following additional selection options appear. FIL2. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. in addition to the current configuration. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. For rECI. • If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive. In both cases. FIL4. Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once FCS has switched to nO. When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. (1) SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. this means that the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example). FIL3.Application functions menu FUn- FUnSCS Saving the configuration (1) nO nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): FIL1. If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed. The speed reference and the operating direction must be maintained. if the fault has disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart. the procedure is aborted and the drive remains locked until it is powered down then powered up. 10 s. duration of restart process 5 5: 5 minutes 10: 10 minutes 30: 30 minutes 1h: 1 hour 2h: 2 hours 3h: 3 hours Ct: Unlimited This parameter appears if Atr = YES. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s. The following faults permit this function: External fault (EPF) Loss of 4-20 mA reference (LFF) CANopen fault (COF) System overvoltage (OSF) Loss of a line phase (PHF) Loss of a motor phase (OPF) DC bus overvoltage (ObF) Motor overload (OLF) Serial link (SLF) Drive overheating (OHF) The drive safety relay remains activated if this function is active.Fault menu FLt- ENT FLt- ESC ESC Atr ESC ENT Automatic restart ESC rPr ESC ENT Operating time reset to zero The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position. On the optional remote terminal. then 1 min for the following periods. 5 s. tAr Max. Reset of current fault no nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 rSF These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. Use 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO (page 23). Check that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way. FLtCode Atr Description Factory setting Automatic restart nO nO: Function inactive YES: Automatic restart. It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent fault. after locking on a fault. 60 . nO: Function inactive YES: Function active When the function is operational.Freewheel stop The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart. OPL is forced to YES if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 54). the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Configuration of motor phase loss fault YES nO: Function inactive YES: Triggering of OPF fault OAC: No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and flying restart even if FLr = nO.Reset of current fault or automatic restart . resulting in a slight delay (1 second max. then follows the ramp to the reference speed. it activates at each run command. FLr is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 54). External fault nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3. This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO. To be used with downstream contactor. Configuration of line phase loss fault YES This parameter is only accessible on 3-phase drives.Loss of line supply or disconnection .).Fault menu FLt- FLtCode FLr Description Factory setting Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) nO Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events: . nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault OHF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault OLF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop EtF EPL OPL IPL OHL OLL 61 . you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds. Otherwise. see page 24) YES: Fault with freewheel stop LFF: The drive switches to the fallback speed (LFF parameter) rLS: The drive maintains the speed at which it was travelling when the fault occurred until the fault has disappeared. you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds. a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be guaranteed. Fallback speed 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz Fallback speed setting for stopping in the event of a fault Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage nO nO: Function inactive YES: The line voltage monitoring threshold is: ATV31pppM2: 130 V ATV31pppM3X: 130 V ATV31pppN4: 270 V ATV31pppS6X: 340 V In this case. All active faults are reset on a rising edge (from 1 to 0) of the input. Controlled stop on mains power break nO nO: Locking of the drive and freewheel stopping of the motor NNS: This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as possible. rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Before setting LFL to YES . In order to assign this function. the stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive. Fault inhibit nO Inhibiting faults may damage the drive beyond repair. rMP or FSt. Operating time reset to zero nO nO: No rtH: Operating time reset to zero The rPr parameter automatically falls back to nO as soon as the reset to zero is performed.Fault menu FLt- FLtCode SLL Description Adjustment range Factory setting Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault SLF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault COF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Configuration of auto-tuning fault tnF YES nO: Fault ignored (the drive reverts to the factory settings) YES: Fault with drive locked Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 . check the connection of input AI3. COL tnL LFL LFF drn StP InH rPr 62 . nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Fault monitoring is active when the input is in state 0. This would invalidate the guarantee.20 mA signal fault LFF nO nO: Fault ignored (only value possible if CrL3 y 3 mA. It is inactive when the input is in state 1. rNP: Stop according to the valid ramp (dEC or dE2) FSt: Fast stop. the drive may immediately switch to an LFF fault. In order to assign this function. ) 8n1: 8 data bits. no parity. CONCode Add tbr Description Modbus: Drive address 1 Modbus: Transmission speed 19200 4. etc. 2 stop bits Modbus: Time-out 0.1 to 10 s 10 s CANopen: Drive address 0 to 127 0 CANopen: Transmission speed 125 10. RUN/STOP buttons LCC: Remote terminal: LFr reference page 16.0: 500 kbps 1000: 1000 kbps CANopen: Error registry (read-only) 0: "No error" 1: "Bus off error" 2: "Life time error" 3: "CAN overrun" 4: "Heartbeat error" Forced local mode nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 In forced local mode. Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local AI1 mode AIP for Can only be accessed if LAC = 3 ATV31pppA In forced local mode.0: 250 kbps 500. logic inputs LI AIP: Potentiometer (type A drives only). See the diagrams on pages 28 to 31. tFO.8: 4800 bps 9. 1 stop bit 8E1: 8 data bits. AdCO and bdCO are only taken into account following a restart.Communication menu COM- ENT CON- ESC ESC Add ESC ENT ESC FLOC ESC ENT The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present.0: 125 kbps 250. logic inputs LI AI2: Analog input AI2. Adjustment range 1 to 247 Factory setting tFO ttO AdCO bdCO ErCO FLO FLOC These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.) Modbus communication format 8E1 8O1: 8 data bits. 1 stop bit 8n2: 8 data bits. the terminal block and display terminal regain control of the drive. odd parity. are not active. only the speed reference is taken into account.0: 20 kbps 50. even parity.0: 10 kbps 20. On the optional remote terminal. PI functions. 63 . logic inputs LI AI3: Analog input AI3. Modifications to parameters Add.2: 19200 bps (Caution: The remote terminal can only be used with this value. this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position. AI1: Analog input AI1. no parity. tbr.6: 9600 bps 19. 1 stop bit (Caution: The remote terminal can only be used with this value. summing inputs.0: 50 kbps 125. RUN/STOP/FWD/REV buttons. Whilst the value of the new monitoring parameter required is being displayed. press and hold down the "ENT" key (2 seconds) to confirm the change of monitoring parameter and store this. Like menus. sub-menus are identified by a dash after their code: LIA. the value displayed is that of one of the monitoring parameters. In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through endless parameters. the value of this parameter will be displayed while the drive is running (even after it has been disconnected). the drive will return to the previous parameter after it has been switched off. On the optional remote terminal. From now on.for example. 64 . When the drive is running. If the new choice is not confirmed by pressing the "ENT" key a second time.Display menu SUP- ENT SUP- ESC ESC LFr ENT ESC ESC LIACPU ENT ENT Sub-menu ESC ESC ESC ENT ESC Parameters can be accessed with the drive running or stopped. Some functions have numerous parameters. By default. the value displayed is the output frequency applied to the motor (rFr parameter). this menu can be accessed with the switch in any position. these functions have been grouped in sub-menus. calculated using the parameters entered in the drC. Current in the motor Motor power 100% = Nominal motor power.menu.500 Hz to + 500 Hz tHd LFt Otr rtH Output value in customer units SPd1 or SPd2 or SPd3 depending on the SdS parameter.menu (see page 62). These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled. Can be reset to zero by the rPr parameter in the FLt.20 mA fault on AI3 nOF: No fault saved ObF: DC bus overvoltage fault OCF: Overcurrent fault OHF: Drive overheating fault OLF: Motor overload fault OPF: Motor phase loss fault OSF: Line supply overvoltage fault PHF: Line supply phase loss fault SCF: Motor short-circuit fault (phase. Operating time 0 to 65530 hours Total time the motor has been powered up: 0 to 9999 (hours). earth) SLF: Modbus communication fault SOF: Motor overspeed fault tnF: Auto-tuning fault USF: Line supply undervoltage fault Motor torque 100% = Nominal motor torque. calculated using the parameters entered in the drC. see page 19 (SPd3 in factory settings mode). Line voltage (gives the line voltage via the DC bus.53 (kilo-hours).Display menu SUP- SUPCode LFr rPI FrH rFr SPd1 or SPd2 or SPd3 LCr Opr ULn tHr Description Frequency reference for control via built-in terminal or remote terminal Internal PI reference Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value) Output frequency applied to the motor Variation range 0 to 500 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 500 Hz . motor running or stopped) Motor thermal state 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OLF" threshold (motor overload) Drive thermal state 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OHF" threshold (motor overload) Last fault bLF: Brake control fault CFF: Configuration (parameters) incorrect CFI: Configuration (parameters) invalid COF: Communication fault line 2 (CANopen) CrF: Capacitor pre-charge fault EEF: EEPROM memory fault EPF: External fault InF: Internal fault LFF: 4 . 65 .menu.00 to 65. then 10. State of auto-tuning tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor. If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input.1 IE02. do not forget to make a careful note of it. Analog input functions Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned.To lock access with a new code when the parameters have been unlocked. AIAAI1A AI2A AI3A 66 . PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed. Caution: Before entering a code.g. "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. the display changes to "On" and the parameters remain locked. . dOnE: The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to manage the drive. Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. "OFF" remains on the screen. If no functions have been assigned. • 0FF: No access locking codes . enter a code (2 to 9999). check that they are compatible. nO is displayed.To unlock access. return to "OFF" using the button and press "ENT". Strd: The cold stator resistance (rSC other than nO) that is used to control the motor. check that they are compatible.To clear locking when the parameters have been unlocked.: 1102 = V1. • XXXX: Parameter access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen). FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed. . PrOG: Auto-tuning in progress. The parameters are unlocked and will remain unlocked until the next restart. with only a temporary choice of parameter displayed. only the monitoring parameters can be accessed. • On: A code is locking access (2 to 9999) . . If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input.To reactivate locking with the same code when the parameters have been unlocked. nO is displayed. The display can be incremented using . Logic input functions Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. . Now press "ENT". The code remains on the display and access is unlocked until the next power down. Parameter access will be locked again on the next power-up. Indicates the ATV31 firmware version. Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. tUS UdP LIALI1A LI2A LI3A LI4A LI5A LI6A LIS Can be used to display the state of the logic inputs (using the segments of the display: high = 1. E. When access is locked using a code. return to "On" using the button then press "ENT". low = 0) State 1 State 0 LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6 Example above: LI1 and LI6 are at 1.If an incorrect code is entered.To lock access. LI2 to LI5 are at 0.Display menu SUP- SUPCode COd Description Terminal locking code Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code. "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. enter a new code (increment the display using or ) and press "ENT". enter the code (incrementing the display using ) and press "ENT". menu. The drive is unlocked after a fault by: • Switching off the drive until the display disappears completely. Spares and repairs: Consult Schneider Electric product support. mounting and connections have been observed. fault display If a problem arises during setup or operation. Atr = YES) • Via a logic input when this input is assigned to the "fault reset" function (FLt. Assistance with maintenance. Find the cause of the fault in order to correct it. • Ensure that the temperature around the unit remains at an acceptable level and that ventilation is effective (average service life of fans: 3 to 5 years depending on the operating conditions). ensure that the recommendations relating to the environment. rSF = LIp) Monitoring menu: This is used to prevent and find the causes of faults by displaying the drive status and its current values.menu. 67 . • Remove any dust from the drive. Clearing the fault Cut the power supply to the drive in the event of a non-resettable fault. flashing. It is nevertheless advisable to perform the following regularly: • Check the condition and tightness of connections.RC) contact opens. Wait for the display to go off completely. if it has been configured for this function.Maintenance Servicing The Altivar 31 does not require any preventative maintenance. The first fault detected is stored and displayed. then switching on again • Automatically in the cases described in the "automatic restart" function (FLt. on the screen: the drive locks and the fault relay (RA . and drC. • The assignment of the "Fast stop" or "Freewheel stop" functions will prevent the drive from starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not powered up. • Significant earth leakage current at • Reduce the switching frequency. check the power supply to the drive.menu (see page 54).Remedies Drive does not start. • Check the size of the motor/drive/load. close it during auto-tuning. • Incorrect parameters in the SEt. • Check the Ibr setting in the FUn. • If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at zero. SOF. Faults which cannot be reset automatically The cause of the fault must be removed before resetting by switching off and then on again. • Mechanical blockage • Short-circuit or earthing at the • Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor. • Replace the drive. no fault displayed • If the display does not light up. CrF Capacitor load circuit EEF EEPROM fault InF Internal fault OCF Overcurrent SCF Motor short-circuit SOF Overspeed tnF Auto-tuning fault 68 . CrF. • If the reference channel (page 28) or the control channel (page 29) is assigned to Modbus or CANopen. Fault bLF Brake sequence Probable cause Remedy • Brake release current not reached • Check the drive/motor connection. • Check the motor windings. • Load relay control fault or • Replace the drive.parameters. The ATV31 then displays "nSt" in freewheel stop mode and "FSt" in fast stop mode. power is not suitable for the drive • Motor not connected to the drive • If a downstream contactor is being used. This is normal since these functions are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped safely if there is a wire break. gain and stability parameters. the drive output when several • Connect chokes in series with the motor.menu).menu page 60). • Internal fault • Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility). charging resistor damaged • Internal memory fault • Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).menus • Check the size of the motor/drive/load. motors are connected in parallel • Instability or • Check the motor. • Special motor or motor whose • Use the L or the P ratio (see Uft page 21). • Carry out the recommended adjustment of bEn (see pages 53 and 54). • Check the presence of the motor during auto-tuning.• Check the SEt. • Check that the run command input(s) have been actuated in accordance with the chosen control mode (tCC parameter in the I-O. the drive can only be started up by sending a command for the opposite direction (see page 58). • Replace the drive. • Inertia or load too high • Check the state of the mechanism.Faults .Causes . tnF. bLF and OPF faults can also be reset remotely via logic input (rSF parameter in the FLt. the drive displays nSt on power-up and remains at stop until the communication bus sends a command. • Driving load too high • Add a braking resistor. and drC. • Brake engage frequency bEn = nO (not adjusted) when brake logic bLC is assigned. and the motor drive output insulation. after the cause has disappeared These faults can also be reset by switching the drive off and on again or via a logic input (rSF parameter in the FLt.Remedies Faults which can be reset with the automatic restart function. the drive ventilation and the environment. Faults which can be reset as soon as their cause disappears Fault CFF Configuration fault CFI Configuration fault via serial link Probable cause • The current configuration is inconsistent. • Line supply too low • Transient voltage dip • Damaged load resistor Remedy • Return to factory settings or call up the backup configuration. • Loss of one phase at drive output • Check the connections from the drive to the motor. See the FCS parameter in the I-O-. • Drive temperature too high • Check the motor load. • Please refer to the product-specific documentation.menu page 61). Wait for the drive to cool down before current restarting. • Check the configuration loaded previously. USF Undervoltage • Check the voltage and the voltage parameter. Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting.menu page 61). • Test on a low power motor or without a motor: In factory power too low settings mode. or driving load • Install a braking resistor if necessary. • Disturbed line supply • Drive incorrectly supplied or a • Check the power connection and the fuses. if it is valid. 69 . • Check and optimize the UFr (page 17). set OPL to OAC • Motor not connected or motor (FLt. This protection only operates with the drive on load.Faults . • According to user OSF Overvoltage PHF Line phase failure SLF Modbus fault • Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on • Check the connection on input AI3. phase line supply • Unbalanced load • Disable the fault by setting IPL = nO (FLt. • Replace the drive. • Activate the brA function (page 38) if it is compatible with the application. • Invalid configuration The configuration loaded in the drive via the serial link is inconsistent. • 3-phase ATV31 used on a single • Use a 3-phase line supply.Causes . motor phase loss detection is active (OPL = • Instantaneous instability in the YES). To check the drive in a test or maintenance motor current environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of high power drives). input AI3 • Braking too sudden • Increase the deceleration time. • Interruption in communication on • Check the communication bus. • Load a consistent configuration.menu. check the motor load. • Downstream contactor open • If a downstream contactor is being used. the Modbus bus • Please refer to the product-specific documentation. CtL. drC-. • Triggered by excessive motor • Check the ItH setting (motor thermal protection) (page 16).or FUn. UnS and nCr (page 20) parameters and perform auto-tuning with tUn (page 21). • Line voltage too high • Check the line voltage. deactivate motor phase loss detection (OPL = no).menu page 60) Fault COF CAnopen fault EPF External fault LFF Loss of 4-20mA ObF Overvoltage during deceleration OHF Drive overheated OLF Motor overload OPF Motor phase loss Probable cause • Interruption in communication on the CANopen bus • According to user Remedy • Check the communication bus. fuse blown • Failure of one phase • Reset. ............................. 70 ...7 In (1) 0s 0.. Those which are underlined appear in factory settings mode............................................................... The majority can also be accessed and adjusted in the function configuration menu.................H Code bFr Factory setting 50 Customer setting Settings menu Code ACC AC2 dE2 dEC tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 LSP HSP ItH UFr FLG StA SLP IdC tdC tdC1 SdC1 tdC2 SdC2 JPF JF2 JGF rPG rIG FbS PIC SEtCustomer setting s s s s % % % % Hz Hz A % % % % A s s A s A Hz Hz Hz /s Code rP2 rP3 rP4 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 CLI CL2 tLS rSL UFr2 FLG2 StA2 SLP2 Ftd ttd Ctd SdS SFr Factory setting 30% 60% 90% 10 Hz 15 Hz 20 Hz 25 Hz 30 Hz 35 Hz 40 Hz 45 Hz 50 Hz 55 HZ 60 Hz 70 Hz 80 Hz 90 Hz 100 Hz 1..............5 In (1) 0 (no time limit) 0 20% 20% 20% 100% bFr 100% In (1) 30 4 kHz Customer setting % % % Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz A A s % % % % Hz % A kHz Factory setting 3s 5s 5s 3s 10% 10% 10% 10% 0 Hz bFr According to drive rating 20% 20% 20% 100 Hz 0........................................7 In (1) 0.........5 s 0.............................. 1st level adjustment parameter >... (if applicable).....5 In (1) 1........5 In (1) 0 Hz 0 Hz 10 Hz 1 1/s 1 nO (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate................................................................ These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu................................................ Customer ID no...................................5 s 0.Configuration/Settings table Drive ATV 31.... LI3 if tCC = LOC: nO 4 mA 20 mA Customer setting Code AO1t dO r1 Factory setting 0A nO FLt Customer setting CrL3 CrH3 mA mA r2 nO Control menu Code LAC Fr1 Fr2 rFC CHCF Cd1 CtLCustomer setting Code Cd2 CCS COp LCC PSt rOt Factory setting Mdb Cd1 nO nO YES dFr Customer setting Factory setting L1 AI1 AIP for ATV31pppA nO Fr1 SIM tEr LOC for ATV31pppA These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been enabled. 71 . LI2 if tCC = 3C.Configuration/Settings table Motor control menu Code bFr UnS FrS nCr nSP COS rSC drCCustomer setting Hz V Hz A RPM Code tUS UFt nrd SFr tFr SrF Factory setting tAb n YES 4 kHz 60 Hz nO Customer setting Factory setting 50 Hz According to drive rating 50 Hz According to drive rating According to drive rating According to drive rating nO kHz Hz I/O menu Code tCC tCt rrS I-OFactory setting 2C ATV31pppA: LOC trn if tCC = 2C. 72 .7 In (1) 0s 0.5 In (1) Factory setting Customer setting LIn StC- AdC- SAIPSS- tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 ACC dEC rPS Frt AC2 dE2 brA Stt FSt dCF dCI IdC tdC nSt AdC tdC1 SdC1 tdC2 SdC2 SA2 SA3 PS2 PS4 PS8 PS16 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 10% 10% 10% 10% 3s 3s nO 0 5s 5s YES Stn nO 4 nO 0.Configuration/Settings table Application functions menu Code rPCrPt FUnCode JOGJOG Factory setting Customer setting If tCC = 2C: nO If tCC = 3C: LI4 If tCC = LOC: nO 10 Hz nO nO nO nO 1 1 1 nO nO nO 30% 60% 90% 0 nO 0% nO According to drive rating 0.5 s nO YES 0. They can also be accessed in the SEt menu.5 In (1) AI2 nO If tCC = 2C: LI3 If tCC = 3C: LI4 If tCC = LOC: LI3 If tCC = 2C: LI4 If tCC = 3C: nO If tCC = LOC: LI4 nO nO 10 Hz 15 Hz 20 Hz 25 Hz 30 Hz 35 Hz 40 Hz 45 Hz 50 Hz 55 Hz 60 Hz 70 Hz 80 Hz 90 Hz 100 Hz % % % % s s Hz s s UPd- PI- A s bLCs A s A LC2- JGF USP dSP Str PIF rPG rIG FbS PIC Pr2 Pr4 rP2 rP3 rP4 rSL PII rPI bLC brL Ibr brt bEn bEt bIP LC2 CL2 Hz % % % % Hz A s Hz s A CHP- CHP nO Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz LSt- UnS2 According to drive rating FrS2 50 Hz nCr2 nSP2 According to drive rating COS2 UFt2 n UFr2 20% FLG2 20% StA2 20% SLP2 100 Hz LAF nO LAr nO LAS nSt V Hz A RPM % % % Hz (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.5 s 0.7 In 0.5 s nO nO 1. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been enabled.5 s nO 0. Configuration/Settings table Fault menu Code Atr tAr rSF FLr EtF EPL OPL IPL OHL OLL FLtCustomer setting Code SLL COL tnL LFL LFF drn StP InH rPr Factory setting YES YES YES nO 10 Hz nO nO nO nO Customer setting Factory setting nO 5 nO nO nO YES YES YES YES YES Hz Communication menu Code Add tbr tFO ttO AdCO Factory setting 1 19200 8E1 10 s 0 CONCustomer setting Code bdCO FLO FLOC s Factory setting 125 nO AI1 AIP for ATV31pppA Customer setting These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been enabled. 73 . Index of parameter codes AC2 ACC AdC AdCO Add AI1A AI2A AI3A AO1t Atr bdCO bEn bEt bFr bIP bLC brA brL brt CCS Cd1 Cd2 CHCF CHP CL2 CLI COd COp COS COS2 CrH3 CrL3 Ctd dCF dCI dE2 dEC dO drn dSP EPL ErCO EtF FbS FCS FLG FLG2 FLO 38 38 41 63 63 66 66 66 24 60 63 54 54 20 54 54 38 54 54 35 34 34 34 56 55 18 66 35 20 57 24 24 19 39 39 38 16 24 62 48 61 63 61 51 22 17 57 63 FLOC FLr Fr1 Fr2 FrH FrS FrS2 Frt FSt Ftd HSP Ibr IdC InH IPL ItH JF2 JGF JOG JPF LAC LAF LAr LAS LC2 LCC LCr LFF LFL LFr LFt LI1A LI2A LI3A LI4A LI5A LI6A LIS LSP nCr nCr2 nrd nSP nSP2 nSt OHL OLL OPL 63 61 33 33 65 20 56 38 39 19 16 54 39 62 61 16 18 46 46 18 33 58 58 58 55 35 65 62 62 65 65 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 16 20 56 22 20 56 40 61 61 61 Opr Otr PIC PIF Pr2 Pr4 PS16 PS2 PS4 PS8 PSt r1 r2 rFC rFr rIG rOt rP2 rP3 rP4 rPG rPI rPI rPr rPS rPt rrS rSC rSF rSL rtH SA2 SA3 SCS SdC1 SdC2 SdS SFr SLL SLP SLP2 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 65 65 51 51 51 51 45 44 44 44 35 24 24 34 65 51 35 51 51 51 51 52 65 62 38 37 23 21 60 52 65 42 42 22 41 41 19 22 62 17 57 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SPd1 SPd2 SPd3 SrF StA StA2 StP Str Stt tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 tAr tbr tCC tCt tdC tdC1 tdC2 tFr tHd tHr tLS ttd ttO tUn tUS tUS UdP UFr UFr2 UFt UFt2 ULn UnS UnS2 USP 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 65 65 65 22 17 57 62 48 39 37 38 38 38 60 63 23 23 39 41 41 22 65 65 18 19 63 21 21 66 66 17 57 21 57 65 20 56 48 74 . speed 2-wire/3-wire control Analog/logic output AOC/AOV Automatic restart Automatic standstill DC injection Brake control CANopen: Drive address Control and reference channels Control channel switching Current limit DC injection via logic input Deceleration ramp adaptation Drive thermal protection Drive ventilation Fast stop via logic input Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) Forced local mode Freewheel stop via logic input Function access level Jog operation Management of limit switch Modbus: Drive address Motor control auto-tuning Motor switching Motor thermal protection Motor thermal protection .Index of functions +/.max. thermal current PI regulator Preset speeds Ramp switching Ramps Reference switching Relay r1 Relay r2 Reset of current fault Return to factory settings/restore configuration Saving the configuration Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio Skip frequency Stop modes Summing inputs Switching for second current limit Switching frequency 47 23 24 60 41 53 63 26 35 18 39 38 5 5 39 61 63 40 33 46 58 63 21 56 6 16 49 43 38 37 34 24 24 60 22 22 21 18 39 42 55 22 75 . VVDED303042 EN atv31_programming manual_EN_V1 2003-09 .